P. 1
nsnsn Optimization

nsnsn Optimization

|Views: 15|Likes:
gsm
gsm

More info:

Published by: Neelesh Kumar Marele on Feb 03, 2013
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as XLS, PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

12/15/2014

pdf

text

original

Parameters

Table

Recommended value

Default

Frequency Band MCC MNC NCC

Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common Cell_Common

GSM900&DCS1800 470 02 0~7 None None 0

BCC

Cell_Common

0~7

0

GPRS Support

Cell_Common

support GPRS

not support GPRS

EDGE Support

Cell_Common

No

No

Cellband

Cell_Common

0

0

RAC

Cell_Common

As per plan

As per plan

FH MODE

Cell_Common

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Cell_Common

63

62

Cell Extension Type

Cell_Common

Normal cell

Normal Cell

Cell Antenna Hopping

Cell_Common

None

None

UL DTX

Cell_Common

Shall Use

Shall Use

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Cell_Common

1

1

Direct Retry

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

DL PC Allowed TRX Index

Cell_Common TRx

Yes Depend on invidual site

Yes 65535

TRX No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

255

Cell Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

None

Site Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

65535

Active State

TRx

Activated

Activated

Receive Mode

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

None

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Basic_Parameter

63

62

DL DTX

Basic_Parameter

No (tunable based on performance)

Yes

Direct Retry

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Basic_Parameter

1

8

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

UL DTX

Basic_Parameter

Shall Use

Shall Use

Flex HSN Switch

CH_MGT

Close

Close

th3(H) Call_Control 26 63 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12 16 .th2(H) Call_Control 18 26 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 3 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close Allocation TRX Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes AMR DL Coding Rate adj.

th1(H) Call_Control 12 14 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26 63 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 3 .hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 3 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18 24 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.

hyst2(F) Call_Control 3 2 .th3(F) Call_Control 26 30 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) Call_Control 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18 22 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 1 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) Call_Control 3 3 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12 As per plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj.

th1(F) Call_Control 12 12 Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 52 MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 4 Times N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23 .AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18 18 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26 As per frequency plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) Call_Control 2 2 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.

HO 30 30 ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65 DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65 .AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 52 AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 64 Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Call_Control 75 85 T3105(10ms) HO 7 7 Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.

Threshold HO 50 60 DL Qual. Threshold HO 50 60 MS Power Prediction after HO HO No No Inter-System Handover Enable HO No No PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes MS Fast Moving HO Allowed HO No No Load HO Allowed HO Yes No SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0 TO Idle_Mode 0 0 .UL Qual.

Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode 0 No PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB .

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) Idle_Mode 60(should same for same LAC) 20 BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode 4 Multiframe Period 2 Multiframe Period BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 1 2 NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 255 11111111 .

Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode 0 No ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10 T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000 T3109(ms) Other_Properties 27000 27000 T8(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T3121(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T3107(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T7(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 T3101(ms) Other_Properties 3000 3000 .

Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) Other_Properties 92 92 . Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) Other_Properties 87 87 Interf.Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) Other_Properties 85 85 Interf.

Interf. Power_Control 5 5 Filter Length for UL Qual. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) Other_Properties 98 98 Interf. Power_Control 4 5 . Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) Other_Properties 110 110 Filter Length for DL Qual. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) Other_Properties 105 105 Interf.

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5 Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 4 5 DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3 DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1 DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 20 25 DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 30 35 .

Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3 UL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1 UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 20 UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 30 PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 Min Access Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 15 15 PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 .UL Qual.

GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec GPRS Temporary Offset Data_In_PCU 10dB 10dB T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms .

.

The NCC is unique nationwide. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. For example. This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. even if the TRX is configured with FH data. see GSM Rec. a delay of about 120 This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC. and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. This parameter specifies the base station color code. In addition. and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. This parameter specifies the network color code. system information. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. for example. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. In a GSM cell. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS. TA equals 219. that is.Description This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC). it cannot be changed. If this parameter is set to Not FH.08. the frequency. This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC). Theoretically. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. FH can be used to average the interferen This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band. the MCC of China is 460. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. Once the frequency band is selected. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. a packet control unit (PCU) must be configured on the BSS side. which improv This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. which is provided by the telecom operator. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC). Each routing area has an ID. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. frame number. For details. value 0 indic This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. . Compared with GSM. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. 05.

This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. or Main Diversity. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly. This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board. see GSM Rec. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. not-activated and activated. BTS3012II. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047 This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. The BTS3012. The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Diversity. which must be unique in one BTS. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity. This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The RF receive mode can be Not Support. Independent Receiver.This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. 05. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. 2. Four Diversity Receiver. This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS. In directed retry. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. Thus a call may drop.. This parameter specifies the TRX number. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC. . Cell Index must be unique in one BSC.08. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. It is n This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. one-to-one mapping between them is not mandatory. the TCHs (includi This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board. BTS3006C. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. In this case. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. Dividing Receiver. In this case. BTS3012AE. many subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. For details.

05. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used. . In this case. Thus. 05. For details. this parameter is set to YES. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell. Thus a call may drop. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function.This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on. see GSM Rec. This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. this parameter can be configured.08. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES. see GSM Rec. you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS and the network layout. In directed retry.08.

the TRX priority factor is effective. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 1 dB. This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment.5 dB.5 dB. the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. and so forth. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. if RQI equals 2. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.5 dB. Usually. the recommended value is set to Yes. If RQI equals 1. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm.This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. and so forth. If RQI equals 1. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.5 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. and so forth. the CIR is 0. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. In tight frequency resuse. the TRX priority factor is ineffective. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 1 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. and so forth. If RQI equals 1. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. . Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. and so forth. If this parameter is set to NO.5 dB. the CIR is 0. If this parameter is set to YES. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. if RQI equals 2. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 0. and so forth. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. In the case of aggressive frequency reuse. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell. the CIR is 1 dB. this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority preferentially. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB.

the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. If RQI equals 1. and so forth. . and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. and so forth. the CIR is 0. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. if RQI equals 2.5 dB. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 0. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 1 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 0. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. If RQI equals 1. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. if RQI equals 2.5 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. if RQI equals 2. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. and so forth. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.

and so forth. if RQI equals 2. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.5 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.5 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. and so forth. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. if RQI equals 2.5 dB. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 0. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. and so forth. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 0. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report.5 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. If RQI equals 1. if RQI equals 2. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the CIR is 1 dB. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1. if RQI equals 2. . Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1. and so forth. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.5 dB. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report.

For details of this parameter. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. if RQI equals 2. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB. If RQI equals 1. If RQI equals 1. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 1 dB. the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified interval. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure. if RQI equals 2.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages. 0408 and 05. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. see GSM Rec. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 0. If RQI equals 1. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. and so forth. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the counter S decreases by 1. This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message.5 dB. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded. the CIR is 1 dB.5 dB. . Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. and so forth.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.08. the CIR is 1 dB. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. the CIR is 0.When the counter S is equal to 0.5 dB. the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS should resend the I frame. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure. the connection is to be re-established or released.Therefore.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the counter S increases by 2. the CIR is 0. Each time an SACCH message is not decoded. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. and so forth. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. the downlink radio link is considered as failed. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. when the voice or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power control or channel handover. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS. there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. the timer T3105 starts. 08. During asynchronous handover. For details. the BTS sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS. Upon detecting the bursts. BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions.08. For details. For details. which can also be a handover failure message. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.58 and 04. the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message. For details.This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees correct MS access. only the cells whose loads are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells. After receiving the message. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS. This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls.08. the BTS starts the timer T3105. This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS. Meanwhile. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter. The maximum times for resending physical information is Ny1. the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105. the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS. . The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. 08.58 and 04. the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. see GSM Rec. When target cells are selected during direct retry. see GSM Rec. Usually. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes. When this parameter is set to Yes. Threshold. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs. Threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs. An intra-cell handover. see GSM Rec. the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted. thus reducing the number of handovers. the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. thus improving the network performance. Based on the path loss. see GSM Rec. This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality. For details.08 and 04. is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. If this parameter is set to Yes. however. An intra-cell handover. 0508 and 0408. This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. When an emergency handover is triggered. the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion.This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. . This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. improve success rate of channel assignment. the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. An emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the UL Qual. 05.08. however. For details. This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. and balance the traffic load among cells. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the DL Qual. The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. To avoid ping-pong handovers.

For details. It is invalid for cell reselection.This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. When PI is set to 1. Actually. this parameter determines the priority of cells. see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis. C2 equals C1. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short). This parameter can prevent frequent location update. sent on the broadcast channel. . When PI is set to 0. the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system information and determines whether a cell is reselected.In addition. see GSM Rec. 1: barred 0: allowed Together with CBA. This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. and PT are used. see GSM Rec.08. indicates whether CRO. For details. 04. 0408 and 0508. thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. that is. For details. the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1. the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. TO.

This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. and VLR. This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. For details. or blind spots. 05. the usage of radio resources drops. the capacity of the paging channel in a cell. In actual situation. take into consideration the processing capability of the MSC and BSC. the number of paging sub-channels in a cell. In the VLR. HLR. If the value of this parameter increases. that is. the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. . 05. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1.08. and the average standby time is greatly shortened. and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases. thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging sub-channel and prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH. the number of paging sub-channels in a cell increases. The load of the paging channels should be periodically measured on the running network. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). In addition.02. the load on the A interface. This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel.When setting this parameter. the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. Abis interface. When the location update period decreases.02 and 05. the MS power consumption increases. the MS does not measure the cell level of NCC N. a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller value in suburbs. the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. must be the same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC. that is. a regular location update timer is defined. when the location update period decreases. the service performance is improved. For details about the calculation of the paging group. Thus. But the delay of paging messages increases. an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. rural areas. This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance. see GSM Rec. If bit N is 0.In addition. This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. When the signaling traffic of the network increases.This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. After the CCCH is configured. Generally. The value of this parameter should be adjusted on the basis of the load. Um interface. see GSM Rec.

After the BSC sends a handover command. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message. the outgoing BSC handover fails. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. After the timer T7 expires. Before the timer T7 expires. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires. . see GSM Rec. the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message. the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires. the timer T3107 is initiated. thus saving the network processing time and network resources. T3101 is stopped. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops. 04. this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. If this parameter is set to Yes. the BSC sends a handover failure message. This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected. Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the timer expires. their ATTs must be the same. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the BSS releases the seized SDCCH. the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. For different cells in the same LAC. network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off.08. After the timer T3107 expires. and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. Before the timer T3107 expires. if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message. If the timer expires. after the BSC sends a handover request message.This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires. In an outgoing BSC handover. This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed. the timer T7 is initiated. the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. The MS reports a Clear REQ message. This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. Together with CBQ. if the timer T3109 expires. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. the BSC deactivates the channel. For details.

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great.58. 08. Band Thresholds. The values of these levels are called Interf. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. the interference is not reflected. then. 08. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. This helps the BSC to assign channels. The BTS. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. The values of these levels are called Interf. According to the strength of interference signals. see GSM Rec. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. This helps the BSC to assign channels. the interference is too obvious. then. The BTS. 08. then. the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. 08.21. see GSM Rec.This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. the interference is not reflected. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds.58. According to the strength of interference signals. and 12. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. 08. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. see GSM Rec. This helps the BSC to assign channels.08. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels.08. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. and 12. For details.08.58. the interference is too obvious. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The BTS. the interference is not reflected.21. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. According to the strength of interference signals. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details. For details. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. Band Thresholds. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. The values of these levels are called Interf. . 08. and 12.

08. and 12. The values of these levels are called Interf.08. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. The BTS. the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. see GSM Rec. This helps the BSC to assign channels. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. then. According to the strength of interference signals.21. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. then. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover.This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small. the interference is not reflected. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. This helps the BSC to assign channels. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. 08. Band Thresholds. According to the strength of interference signals. the interference is not reflected. see GSM Rec. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds.08. 08. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. For details. For details. 08. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover.08. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. The values of these levels are called Interf.58. According to the strength of interference signals. .21. Band Thresholds. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. and 12. This helps the BSC to assign channels. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds.58. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels.58. The BTS. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.21. The BTS. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. Band Thresholds. 08. the interference is too obvious. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. 08. sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The values of these levels are called Interf. the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. then. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. see GSM Rec. and 12. reports a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. For details. the interference is not reflected. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great. the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great.

4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.2% to 0. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0. power control is performed. power control is performed.2% to 6. . When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 12.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.6% to 3. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.8% When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.4% to 0.6% to 3. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.2% to 6. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold.8% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set.4% to 0.8% to 1.8% to 1. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold.4% to 0. .2% to 6. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12.4% to 12. power control is performed.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.4% to 0. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4. power control is performed.When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality.8% When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0. Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs. Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as a candidate cell for handover. Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.2% to 6.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control.6% to 3. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Value 1 indicates one PRACH. This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0. This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6..2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.4% to 12.2% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands.8% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.8% to 1. . the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.6% to 3.2% to 0.

If T3192 expires. This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received. When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description. If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires. . the MS enters the packet idle mode. T3168 is started to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network. This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message. the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. Otherwise. the MS sends the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts T3192 at the same time. the MS initiates the PS access procedure again for four times. the MS responds immediately. Therefore. it enters the dedicated mode. the MS regards that this uplink TBF establishment has failed. The timer is sent through the system message broadcast in each cell. During the TBF release process.This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. Value infinity indicates an infinity offset. the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time. T3168 is reset. If the MS is in dual transfer mode. This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after receiving the last data block. If the Packet Uplink Assignment message is still not received. the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF release process. This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message.

Configuration Policy

NSN PARAMETER

Name
BAND None None This parameter should be set as required. NCC 1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon MCC MNC

Parameter Name
frequency band in use mobile country code mobile network code

BSIC NCC

BCC

bsIdentityCode

None GENA GPRSenabled

None EGENA egprsEnabled

None BAND frequency band in use

None RAC routing area code

None HOP The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected. HoppingMode

DMAX

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

None DMAX msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

None AHOP The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference DTX 2. On the downlink

dtxMode

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based

RE

callReestablishmentAllowed

RXP

rxLevAccessMin

None DR drInUse

None DYNAMIC_SDCCH None None PENA TRX_ID powerCtrlEnabled TRX ID

None

TRX_NUM

None CI None BTS_ID CellId BTS ID

If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated. Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level BTS is set to STATE Not Activated.

Administrative State

None

RDIV The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.

diversityUsed

DMAX

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

the average call drop rate decreases. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS. and therefore the subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels. If this parameter is set to No. The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC. the required level of received signals is low. the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. reducing system interference. many MSs attempt to camp on the cell. Call reestablishment lasts for a long time. the setting of this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell. DTX drInUse rxLevAccessMin callReestablishmentAllowed dtxMode None HSN1 hoppingSequenceNumber1 .The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. RE The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. this parameter should be set to No. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage. This function has the following benefits: 1. If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side. and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. RXP The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. From the network perspective. If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS. DOWNLINK DTX None DR If the value of this parameter is too small. downlink DTX cannot be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter. It is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. In such a case. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side. Therefore. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. From the network perspective. reducing system interference.To enable this function.

None FLEXIBLE MAIO MANAGEMENT None TRP trxPriorityInTCHAlloc None amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis3 HRH3 None amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis2 HRH2 None amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis1 HRH1 None HRTD3 None HRTD2 None HRTD1 .

None HRH3 None HRH2 None HRH1 None HRTU3 None HRTU2 None HRTU1 None FRH3 .

None FRH2 None FRH1 None FRTD3 None FRTD2 None FRTD1 None FRH3 None FRH2 .

a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call. This parameter takes effect on the downlink. RET radioLinkTimeout maxNumberRetransmission None T200S SDCCH LAPDm T200 . this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access.None FRH1 None FRTU3 None FRTU2 None FRTU1 If this parameter is set to a small value. and therefore resource usage is low. it is recommended this parameter be set to 1. RLT This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low. If this parameter is set to a great value. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high. radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur.

If the AMR function is enabled.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO DETECT (120-180 ms). If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms. If it is set to a too small value. The physical information is sent over the FACCH. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). NY1 The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. the default value of this parameter is 70 ms. the cells with heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover does not make sense. maxNumberOfRepetitions amrHoHrThrUlRxQual QURH amrHoHrThrDlRxQual QDRH amrHoFrThrUlRxQual QURF amrHoFrThrDlRxQual QDRF . the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. ARLT If the value of the parameter is too high. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. If the AMR function is enabled. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms.The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. 20 ms is the reasonable minimum value for this parameter. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. If it is set to a too small value. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. Otherwise. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. the speech quality is improved. the expiration is invalid because the time is shorter than an FACCH period. AHRLT The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. At present. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. T3105 AMR HR Radio Link Timeout AMR Radio Link Timeout DRT drThreshold The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission. the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time.Considering the previous factors. If it is set to a too small value.If the transmission of the physical information over the FACCH is not complete. the speech quality is improved. the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the value of the parameter is too low. it is difficult to select candidate target cells. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. the handover fails. If it is set to a too small value.

this parameter can be set to Yes. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference. extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used. TRHO When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network. but the network interference is reduced. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. the MS does not use the maximum transmit power. EPB It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load.The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. trhoTargetLevel ESD enableSDCCHHandover None PET penaltyTime None TEO temporaryOffset . hoThresholdsQualDL POPT msPwrOptLev None ISHO Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. and thus the handover success rate is decreased. QDR If this parameter is set to Yes. FMT fastMovingThreshold enablePwrBudgetHandover If this parameter is set to YES. If it is set to a lower value. If it is set to a lower value. QUR hoThresholdsQualUL The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls.

HYS cellReselectHysteresis cellReselectParamInd . and the C2 of the new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell in 5s. the cell that the MS camps on for a long time may not be the best after the LA changes. ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases. The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions: Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below 0 within 5s. the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed. PI An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). the path loss is too large.If a better cell exists. Thus.The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system. If this parameter is set to a too small value. A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s. If this parameter is set to a too great value. QUA cellBarQualify The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. When necessary. C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving cell in 5s and the following conditions are met: system information 3 and 4 of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of the serving cell in 5s. the MS reselects a cell. A better cell exists if the above conditions are met.and does not go to the previous cell within 5s.If yes.

it is possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request for a long period. 20. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops. it is possible that a powered-on MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request within a long period. the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. the value of this parameter should be the same in all cells. or 25. To properly specify the value of this parameter. MFR noOfMultiframesBetweenPagin g None AG noOfBlocksForAccessGrant The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. Abis interface. When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC. and the load on the A interface. it is necessary to perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities involved regarding their processing capability and traffic. The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that in the BSC. but a smaller value. In this case. PER timerPeriodicUpdateMS The larger this parameter is set. Um interface. such as 2 or 3.It is recommended that you select a greater value. PLMN plmnPermitted . and VLR." even though the called MS is on. HLR. in the area with light traffic. such as 16. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the system performance. such as the processing capability of the MSC and BSC. the MS is restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell differs from that of the original cell. When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC). system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off. In an LAC. in the area with heavy traffic. In the GSM system.

If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a lower value. this may influence the handover success rate. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a higher value. For a common cell. this may influence the assignment success rate. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may influence the handover success rate. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0. BAR cellBarred None ATT allowIMSIAttachDetach If this timer is set to a lower value. T3101 T3109 T8 T3121 T3107 T7 . If this timer is set to a lower value. this parameter should be set to 0. The value of CBA affects the network access of an MS.The CBA function applies to special conditions. only handovers are allowed in a cell. If this timer is set to a lower value. and direct access of an MS is not allowed. This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value. this may influence the immediate assignment success rate. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. T3122 If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a higher value. T3111 If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a lower value. this may influence the handover success rate.

None BO5 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO4 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO3 interferenceAveragingProcess .

the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. When you configure this parameter. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports.None BO2 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO1 interferenceAveragingProcess None BO0 On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. QDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. QUS interferenceAveragingProcess pcAveragingQualDL / windows size pcAveragingQualUL / windows size .

the quality is poor without power control. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. Thus. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level LDR PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level UDR . and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value. Thus. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. the quality is good without power control. LDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. and call drop may easily occur. Thus. PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual UDR If this parameter is set to a too great value. the quality is good without power control. the uplink level becomes high without power control. PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual LDR If this parameter is set to a too great value. the downlink level becomes low. Thus. the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the downlink level becomes low. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. the conversation quality is degraded.On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. When you configure this parameter. the quality is poor without power control. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the conversation quality is degraded. Thus. Thus. pcAveragingLevDL / windows size LUS pcAveragingLevUL / windows size If this parameter is set to a too great value. the uplink level becomes high without power control. When you configure this parameter.

Thus. PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level LUR If this parameter is set to a too great value. the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. the power control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the uplink level becomes low. None PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level INT SL powerControlInterval rxLevMinCell None PRB bsPRACHBlocks None PBB bsPBCCHBlocks . The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level at HO Access.If this parameter is set to a too great value. the uplink level becomes low. thus the conversation quality is degraded. the battery life is reduced. thus wasting the resources. PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value. the signal quality is good without power control. and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the quality is poor without power control. If this parameter is set to a too small value. Thus. the conversation quality is degraded. PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual LUR If this parameter is set to a too small value. Thus. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the quality is good without power control. and call drop may easily occur. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. Thus. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value. Thus. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the power control may be performed frequently. UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value.

T3192 If the timer is set to a lower value. On the other hand. the network directly sends a Packet Downlink Assignment message to establish a new downlink TBF. the MS takes a longer period to detect the TBF establishment failure. On one hand. When network resources are sufficient. GPET gprsPenaltyTime None GTEO gprsTemporaryOffset If this parameter is set to a higher value. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment increases. T3168 .If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell. that is the GPRS congestion rate is low. the T3192 should be set to a large value. this parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area of the micro cell is large. In addition. you need to comprehensively analyze the traffic models of the cell and take the service load of the cell into consideration. many resources are not used but occupied for a long time. the average delay of packet access is long. Therefore. the value of the T3192 timer depends on the average transmission interval between two successive downlink data. thus shortening the TBF establishment time. the downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period. If no downlink data needs to be sent. If the timer is set to a higher value. the MS releases the TBF resources within a shorter period. If the timer is set to a smaller value. the average delay of packet access is short. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment decreases. if the network sends new downlink PDU data packets. If the download data packets from the network are not received and T3192 does not expire. the TBF resources (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If the TBF establishment fails. If the TBF establishment fails. thus increasing the probability of reassignment by the PCU and wasting system resources. the MS can detect the TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. the small timer value increases the probability of the retransmission of the packet access request. shortening the time to establish new TBFs and improving data transmission rate. However. the network must initiate a paging or immediate assignment procedure.

.

GSM 1800 (1). GSM 1900 (2).Unit Step Size Default Value GSM 900 (0) Range GSM 900 (0).7 Obligatory in creation when LCSE not connected to any segment. GSM 800 (5) 3 characters 2..3 characters 1 0.255 TA 255 2 0. GSM 1800 (1)...... 0…7 N NoYes N Y/N GSM 900 (0) GSM 900 (0).. GSM 800 (5) 255 0…255 No No/BB/RF TA 255 0. GSM 1900 (2)..2 . otherwise read from RNW db.

.N Yes/No dBm -105 -110.16 F - 1…65535 1.-47 N Yes/No Y 1 Yes/No 1.....10 characters Locked (3) N Y/N TA 255 0.255 ....

..-47 N Yes/No 2 0..N Yes/No dBm -105 -110...63/N .2 0 0..

0 0.2 0.5dB 2 0…15 0.5dB 2 0…15 .5dB 0 0…15 0...

.

.

2... 4 or 7 .SACCH 4 20 4.64 4 1.

35 .dBm -100 -110…-47 5 5...

.... -47/ N N Yes/No sec 20 20 20.255 dBm N -109.. -47/ N Yes Yes/No SACCH 0 0..70 .640 dB 10 0 0.7 dBm N -110.......4 0...7 4 0.

.14 .N Y/N N Y/N dB 4 0..

.9 1 0.7 NCC 0…7 ..hours 0.5 4 2.1....25..5 0 / 0.

N Yes/No Y Yes/No .

dBm -47 -47…FIXED dBm -90 -110.-47 dBm -95 -110.-47 .....

.dBm -100 -110......-47 dBm -110 -110…FIXED SACCH 1 1...-47 dBm -105 -110.32 .32 SACCH 1 1.

32 .SACCH 4 1.....32 SACCH 4 1.

.sec dBm 2 -100 0.-47 6 0…12 3 1…4 .31 -110....

sec 10s 10 10…320 dB 0 0…70 .

Parameter Name UL DTX Call Reestablishment Forbidden RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN TCH Immediate Assignment Direct Retry UL PC Allowed DL PC Allowed Encryption Algorithm DL DTX MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment ATT Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a TDMA frame.4.615ms)) Cell_Bar_Access NCC Permitted BS_AG_BLKS_RES BS-PA-MFRAMS Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) CRH PI Cell_Bar_Qualify CRO(2dB) ACS TO PT(s) SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) Proposed Remarks Value Shall Use Shall Use NA Yes Not matched 0 1 with other vendor No No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes <1000000 NA 0> Tunable based on NA No performan ce 63 Old Value NA NA Yes NO Unit None None None None None Bit Period NO Yes 20 (32 NA Satelite Cells) NA 0 NA 255 NA 1 4 4 Multiframe Multiframe Period Period NA 6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 NA 24 40 6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 0 24 Need to standerdiz e To identify MS request 16 at -94 dBm or worst coverage Tunable based on performan ce Ericsson 60 RACH Busy Threshold 5 Paging Times 1 1 .

Access Level T200 SDCCH(5ms) T200 FACCH/F(5ms) T200 FACCH/H(5ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) Use LAPDm N200 N200 of Establish N200 of Release N200 of SACCH N200 of SDCCH N200 of FACCH/Half rate N200 of FACCH/Full rate Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter NA 0 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34 No Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms) NA Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass NA 4 (7 for Satelite Site) Not selected Not selected NA 20 Yes 0(for normal cell). 2(near to Dualband cell) Yes MS MAX Retrans Common Access Control Class Special Access Control Class Emergent Call Disable Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) ECSC All vendor same platform MBR Power Deviation Indication . Default Directed Retry Load Access Threshold NA Speech Version NA TRX Aiding Function Control NA None Random Access Error Threshold RACH Min. 200 1 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34 No 4 If use Imm_Ass Retrans.Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable NA Disable Need to discuss with Huawei 47 Allowed & Recover When Check Res. 2(near to Dualband cell) Yes 2 4 (7 for Satelite Site) Not selected Not selected No 24 Yes 0(for normal cell).

Power Deviation(2dB) Serving Band Reporting 1 NA 1 NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter Qsearch I NA NA Qsearch C Initial NA NA FDD Q Offset NA NA FDD REP QUANT NA NA FDD MULTIRAT Reporting NA NA FDD Qmin NA NA Qsearch P NA NA 3G Search PRIO NA NA Invalid BSIC Reporting NA NA Scale Order NA NA Qsearch C NA NA 900 Reporting Offset NA NA 900 Reporting Threshold NA NA 1800 Reporting Offset NA NA 1800 Reporting Threshold NA NA FDD Reporting Offset NA NA FDD Reporting Threshold NA NA .

Allow Reassign Allow EMLPP Immediate Assignment Opt. Short Message Uplink Disabled Short Message Downlink Disabled Frequency Band of Reassign Max Assignment Retry Times AMR ACS(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR Starting Mode(F) AMR ACS(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR Starting Mode(H) Co-BSC/MSC Adj SDCCH HO Allowed Intracell HO Allowed Load HO Allowed MS Fast Moving HO Allowed Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed PBGT HO Allowed Level HO Allowed Fringe HO Allowed BQ HO Allowed TA HO Allowed

No No NA No No No NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA No No Yes No No No Yes NA NA NA NA

No No NO No No Same Band 2 165 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 1 15 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 0 No No Yes Yes No No Yes NO Yes Yes Yes

Tunable based on performan ce

Tunable based on performan ce

None Tunable based on None performan ce None None

Concentric Circles HO Allowed Interference HO Allowed Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO Watch Time(s) Edge HO Valid Time(s) Layer HO Watch Time(s) Layer HO Valid Time(s) PBGT Watch Time(s) PBGT Valid Time(s) Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis

NA NA 5 10 5 4 5 4 5 4 NA 3

Yes (for MB cell), No for othres Yes 15 20 5 4 5 4 5 4 25 3

Grade Grade Second Second Second Second Second Second Tunable based on dB performan ce Tunable based on Grade performan ce Second Second

Min DL Level on Candidate Cell Intracell F-H HO Allowed Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) F2H HO th H2F HO th Min Interval for TCH HOs Min Interval for SDCCH HOs Min Interval for Consecutive HOs Min Interval for Emerg.HOs Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed Penalty Allowed MS Power Prediction after HO MR.Preprocessing Transfer Original MR Transfer BS/MS Power Class Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR Allowed M.R Number Lost Filter Length for TCH Level Filter Length for TCH Qual Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV Filter Length for TA Penalty Level after HO Fail Penalty Time after HO Fail(s) Penalty Level after BQ HO Penalty Time after BQ HO(s)

15 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 6 NA NA Yes No NA NA Yes NA NA 6 NA 2 NA 6 6 NA NA NA NA

10 Yes 5 4 30 10 4 2 6 2 NO Yes No Yes NO Yes Once Every Second 4 6 6 2 3 6 6 30 10 30 10

Second

None

None

Number of MR Number of MR None Number of MR Number of MR

dB

Penalty Level after TA HO Penalty Time after TA HO(s) Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s) TA Threshold DL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO DL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO Filter Parameter A1 Filter Parameter A2 Filter Parameter A3 Filter Parameter A4 Filter Parameter A5 Filter Parameter A6 Filter Parameter A7 Filter Parameter A8 Filter Parameter B No Dl Mr.HO Allowed No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit System Flux Threshold for Load HO Load HO Threshold Load Req.on Candidate Cell Load HO Bandwidth Load HO Step Period Load HO Step Level MS Fast-moving Watch Cells MS Fast-moving Valid Cells MS Fast-moving Time Threshold MAX Consecutive HO Times Forbidden time after MAX Times Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) UL Expected Level at HO Access K Bias UL to OL HO Allowed OL to UL HO Allowed RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed TA for UO HO Allowed UO Signal Intensity Difference RX_LEV Threshold RX_LEV Hysteresis RX_QUAL Threshold TA Threshold TA Hysteresis UO HO Watch Time(s) UO HO Valid Time(s)

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 5 5 NA NA NA NA 20 6 NA NA 35 NA Yes Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 NA NA

63 10 30 255 50 50 40 40 30 35 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 Yes 60 8 10 5 2 25 10 5 NA NA 15 3 20 6 30 40 35 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes No 0 40 NA 50 63 0 5 4 Need to discuss with Huawei

dB

None None None None None None None None None

dB Second dB None None Times Second Second dB Grade

None None None None None None None dB None Bit Period Bit Period Second Second

TA Pref.Assign Optimum Layer Assign-optimum-level Threshold TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer OtoU HO Received Level Threshold UtoO HO Received Level Threshold UtoO Traffic HO Allowed Traffic Threshold of Underlay Underlay HO Step Period(s) Underlay HO Step Level Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed System optimizatio n NA NA NA NA System optimizatio n Underlaid subcell NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA System optimizatio n 35 63 No 0 System optimizatio n Underlaid subcell 20 35 Yes Need to discuss with Huawei 5 5 5 30 5 3 NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter None dBm Bit Period None Bit Period None None Grade Grade None Second None Second Second Second None Better 3G Cell HO Allowed NA NA Inter-RAT HO Preference NA NA HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell NA NA RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA 3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) NA NA 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s) NA NA Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP NA NA Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP NA NA . of Imme-Assign Allowed TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. Pref.

Upper Threshold UL Qual. Filter Length for DL Qual. Upper Threshold DL Qual. Lower Threshold Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Filter Length for UL Qual. Compensation Allowed NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 30 7 NA 35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4 4 NA 4 NA Yes 1 1 6 4 2 6 16 8 5 10 5 10 16 3 4 4 4 4 Yes . AMR MR.Zone 2 MAX Down Adj.Zone 1 MAX Down Adj. Number Predicted MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. Lower Threshold DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold DL Qual.Value Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff BTS PC Class AMR PC Interval AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV AMR Filter Length for UL Qual AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. T3105(10ms) PC Interval UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold UL Qual. Compensation Allowed UL MR. UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff DL Qual. MAX Up Adj. Bad Trig Threshold UL Qual.Value Qual.Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP NA NA 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter 3G Parameter None 10 ms Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade SACCH Period SACCH Period None Number of MR Number of MR dB dB dB dB dB dB None dB None dB Grade None SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period None Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP NA NA Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT NA NA Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT Max Resend Times of Phy.Value Qual.Zone 0 MAX Down Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV MAX Up Adj.Info. Bad Trig Threshold DL Qual. MR. PC Value by Qual. Number Predicted DL MR.

of DL Level Threshold Interf. Meas. Bad UpLEVDiff AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff AMR BTS PC Class Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed Idle TCH Threshold N1 Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) Interf. PC Value by Qual. Value Qual. Zone 1 AMR MAX Down Adj. Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. Number Predicted AMR DL MR. PC Value by RX_LEV AMR MAX Up Adj. Value Qual.AMR UL MR. PC Value by Qual. NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 80 60 NA NA NA NA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NA NA NA NA 6 6 2 2 1 1 35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4 6 4 2 6 16 8 5 10 5 10 16 2 80 60 Yes Need to discuss with Huawei 1 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 30 50 25 50 6 6 2 2 MR Number MR Number Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade dB dB dB dB dB Grade dB None dB None dB None None Second None Minute Percentag e None None None None None Grade Grade Grade Grade Number of MR Number of MR None None . Upper Threshold AMR DL Qual. Threshold Interf. Priority Allowed Active CH Interf. AMR MAX Up Adj.Threshold Filter Length for TCH Level Filter Length for TCH Qual. Lower Threshold AMR MAX Down Adj. Bad Trig Threshold AMR UL Qual. Value Qual.of UL Level Threshold Interf. Lower Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR DL Qual. AMR UL Qual. Number Predicted AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR ULQual.of UL Qual.of DL Qual. Zone 2 AMR MAX Down Adj.Allowed Allocation TRX Priority Allowed History Record Priority Allowed Balance Traffic Allowed Interf. Upper Threshold AMR UL Qual. Zone 0 AMR MAX Down Adj.

Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms)) Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) Frame Start Time DC Bias Voltage Threshold Power Output Error Threshold Power Output Reduction Threshold VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold VSWR TRX Error Threshold Radio Resource Report Period(s) CCCH Load Indication Period(s) CCCH Load Threshold Overload Indication Period NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA None None NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 15 Second Average RACH Load Timeslot Number NA Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) NA . Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) Interf.Updata Period of CH Record(min) Updata Freq.of CH Record AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed NA NA NA 30 2 Yes 2 60 Yes 30 30 Need to discuss with Huawei <0110111 000> Yes 20 40 55 70 80 90 3 Need to discuss with Huawei 110 105 98 92 87 85 20 Need to discuss with Huawei 65535 3 2 2 2 2 10 15 80 15 5000 360 Minute None AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold NA TCH req suspend interval(s) Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid Subcell Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Underlaid Subcell Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted NA NA NA NA Second NA Data service Allowed SMCBC DRX Cell Load0 Threshold Cell Load1 Threshold Cell Load2 Threshold Cell Load3 Threshold Cell Load4 Threshold Cell Load5 Threshold Cell Load Change Delay Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) Interf.

0 (1800) NA Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 5 (900).Included Angle(Degree) NA 360 Discard BCCH TS Power while calculating Power Control in BBHoppin g PWRC Not selected Yes MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Support Half Rate Abis Flow Control Permitted Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Directly Magnifier Site Flag Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout) Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM response) Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO access fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Drop Optimize Release Indication Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure Drop Optimize Equipment Failure Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time Drop Optimize Resource Check Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover Timeout Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch T3101(ms) ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) T3103A(ms) T3103C(ms) T7(ms) 5 (900). 0 (1800) Yes Yes 15 No 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Yes 3000 5000 10000 10000 10000 Second None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None ms ms ms ms ms .

T3107(ms) T3121(ms) T8(ms) T3109(ms) T3111(ms) TREESTABLISH(ms) T3122(s) NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10000 10000 10000 27000 1000 15000 10 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms .

Parameters Table Recommended Value Single band 900MHz Default Multiband Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900 GSM900&DCS1800 Administrative State Cell_Common Unlocked Unlocked Layer of the Cell Cell_Common 3 3 3 MCC Cell_Common 470 470 None MNC Cell_Common 02 02 None NCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0 BCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0 Cell Priority Cell_Common Prior-1 Prior-1 Prior-1 Activity Status Cell_Common Activated Activated Activated PCU Cell_Common 255 255 255 GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS support GPRS not support GPRS Support Baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes .

EDGE Support Cell_Common No No No 8PSK power attenuation grade Cell_Common 0 0 0 Support NACC Cell_Common No No No Support PACKET SI STATUS Cell_Common No No No Support NC2 Cell_Common No No No PCU Support 64 Neighbor Cells Cell_Common No No No Level report switch Cell_Common Support Support Support Cellband Cell_Common 0 2 0 RAC Cell_Common As per plan As per plan As per plan Support DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support Support Enhanced DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support Encryption Algorithm Cell_Common 00000001 00000001 1 FH MODE Cell_Common As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan DL DTX Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes .

55km)) Cell_Common 62 62 62 Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell Normal cell Normal Cell Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None None None Enhanced Concentric Allowed Cell_Common No Yes Yes Cell Type Cell_Common Normal Cell Concentric Cell Normal cell Attributes of UL And OL Subcells Cell_Common NONE NONE NONE BCCH Concentric Attribute Cell_Common None Underlaid Subcell None UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use Call Reestablishment Forbidden Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Cell_Common 1 1 1 TCH Immediate Assignment Cell_Common No No No Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes UL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes .MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.

DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes Allow Dynamic Voltage Cell_Common Adjustment Yes Yes Yes TRX Index TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 65535 TRX No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 Cell Index TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Site Index TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 65535 Board Type TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Active State TRx Activated Activated Activated Abis Mode TRx Auto Auto Auto Cabinet No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 Subrack No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None TEI TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 . TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 Slot No.

(8K) TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 RSL Logic No.(8K) TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 RSL In Site Port No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 255 RSL In Site Timeslot No.Out-BSC Subrack No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Out-BSC Timeslot No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 2048 Hop Type TRx As per frequency plan As per frequency plan None Power Level TRx 0 0 0 Power Type TRx Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration Default HW_Concentric Attribute TRx None TRX Priority TRx Level0 Level0 Level0 Shut Down Enable TRx Enable Enable Enable TCH Rate Adjust Allow TRx Yes Yes No . TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site None Out-BSC Port No. TRx Depend on invidual site Depend on invidual site 0 Out-BSC Slot No.

TRX 8PSK Level TRx 0 0 0 Wireless Link Alarm Flag TRx No No No Abnormal Release Statistic Base TRx 100 100 100 Abnormal Warn Threshold TRx 100 100 100 Abnormal Release Threshold TRx 50 50 50 Statical Period of Notraffic(5min) TRx 48 48 48 Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit TRx Yes Yes Yes WLA Prompting Recover Period(5min) TRx 12 12 12 Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour) TRx 8 8 8 End Time of WLA Detection(hour) TRx 22 22 22 Up Down Balance Basic TRx Difference 8 8 8 Up Down Balance Floating Range TRx 30 30 30 Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold TRx 80 80 80 Receive Mode TRx Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration None .

TRx 255 255 255 Reverse Out-BSC Port No. TRx 255 255 255 Reverse Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K) TRx 255 255 255 Transmission Type of Abis Interface TRx TDM TDM TDM Maximum PDCH numbers of carrier TRx 8 8 8 MaxAbisTSOccupied TRx 32 32 32 Co-TRX for Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) TRx 255 255 255 . TRx 255 255 255 Reverse RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K) TRx 255 255 255 Reverse RSL In Site Port No.Send Mode TRx Depends on BTS/site configuration Depends on BTS/site configuration None Allow Shutdown of TRX TRx Power Amplifier Yes Yes No Antenna Hopping Index TRx No No No Power Finetune TRx Default Default Default TRX Antenna Hopping TRx None None None Reverse Out-BSC Slot No.

55km)) Basic_Parameter 63 63 62 DL DTX Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes .InHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535 HubHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535 TRXNoInHub TRx 255 255 255 XPUSlotNo TRx 0 0 0 TRX Ability TRx 1 1 PhysicalPassNo TRx 1 1 Priority TRx NONE QTRU Priority TRx 255 255 RevInHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535 Time Slot Power Rerserve TRx 0 0 0 Allow Dynamic Voltage Basic_Parameter Adjustment Yes Yes Yes Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.

Encryption Algorithm Basic_Parameter 1 1 1 DL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes UL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes TCH Immediate Assignment Basic_Parameter No No No RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Basic_Parameter 1 1 8 Call Reestablishment Forbidden Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use GSM900 Band Traffic Load Share Threshold CH_MGT 25 25 25 Channel Assignment Allowed for Insufficient CH_MGT Power No No Yes Qtru Down Link Path Loss Compensation CH_MGT 4 4 4 Qtru Estimate Bts Power CH_MGT 35 35 35 Qtru Down Power Inadequate Last Time CH_MGT 3 3 3 Qtru Down Power Inadequate Stat Time CH_MGT 5 5 5 .

Qtru Power Sharing CH_MGT None None None Observed time of uplink received level difference Duration of uplink received level difference CH_MGT 5 5 5 CH_MGT 4 4 4 Smooth factor of uplink received level CH_MGT 6 6 6 Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold CH_MGT 100 100 100 CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes CH_MGT 50 50 50 Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid CH_MGT Subcell 50 50 50 Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close Fix Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%) 80 80 80 Flex Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%) 80 80 80 TCH req suspend interval(s) CH_MGT 60 60 60 AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold CH_MGT 40 40 40 .

2 2 2 Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Level As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan Filter Length for TCH Qual.of DL Qual.of UL Level Threshold CH_MGT 10 10 10 History Record Priority CH_MGT Allowed Yes Yes Yes Allocation TRX Priority CH_MGT Allowed Yes Yes Yes Active CH Interf. Meas.of DL Level Threshold CH_MGT 25 25 25 Interf.AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed CH_MGT As per plan As per plan As per plan Update Freq.Threshold CH_MGT 40 40 40 Interf.of CH Record CH_MGT 2 2 2 Update Period of CH Record(min) CH_MGT 30 30 30 Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Qual.Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes .of UL Qual. Threshold CH_MGT 40 40 40 Interf. CH_MGT Yes Yes 6 Filter Length for TCH Level CH_MGT 6 6 4 Interf.

hyst2(H) Call_Control 4 4 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 2 4 AMR DL Coding Rate adj. Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) CH_MGT 1 50 50 TIGHT BCCH Switch CH_MGT No No No Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) CH_MGT Supported Not Support DPBT Not Support Channel Allocate Strategy CH_MGT Capability preferred Capability preferred Capability preferred Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) CH_MGT 60 60 60 Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum CH_MGT 80 80 80 Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 CH_MGT 2 2 2 AMR Starting Mode(H) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.Interf.hyst3(H) Call_Control 10 10 15 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 30 30 63 .

th2(H) Call_Control 18 18 24 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 10 10 15 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 38 38 30 .th3(H) Call_Control 30 30 63 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12 12 14 AMR ACS(H) Call_Control 1101 1101 1101 AMR Starting Mode(F) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 6 6 3 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) Call_Control 12 12 16 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) Call_Control 18 18 26 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) Call_Control 4 4 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) Call_Control 2 2 4 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) Call_Control 4 4 3 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.AMR DL Coding Rate adj.

hyst3(F) Call_Control 5 5 1 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 20 20 12 AMR ACS(F) Call_Control 11100100 11100100 11100100 Max Assignment Retry Call_Control Times 2 2 1 Frequency Band of Reassign Call_Control Same Band Different Band Different Band Short Message Downlink Disabled Call_Control No No No Immediate Assignment Call_Control Opt.th3(F) Call_Control As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control As per plan As per plan As per plan AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 28 28 22 AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) Call_Control 2 2 2 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control Yes Yes 18 AMR UL Coding Rate adj.AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) Call_Control 4 4 2 AMR UL Coding Rate adj. No No No Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch Call_Control No No No .

Allow EMLPP Call_Control No No No Allow Reassign Call_Control Yes Yes Yes TDD Cell Threshold Call_Control 1 0 0 TDD Cell offset Call_Control 0 0 0 Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control 1 1 1 TDD Cell Reselect Diversity(dB) Call_Control 8 8 8 FDD Reporting Threshold Call_Control 0 0 0 FDD Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0 1800 Reporting Threshold Call_Control 0 0 0 1800 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0 900 Reporting Threshold Call_Control 0 0 0 900 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0 Qsearch C Call_Control 15 15 15 Scale Order Call_Control +0dB +0dB +0dB .

Invalid BSIC Reporting Call_Control No No No 3G Search PRIO Call_Control Yes Yes Yes Qsearch P Call_Control 15 15 15 FDD Qmin Call_Control 0 0 0 FDD MULTIRAT Reporting Call_Control 2 2 2 FDD REP QUANT Call_Control RSCP RSCP RSCP FDD Q Offset Call_Control 8 8 8 Qsearch C Initial Call_Control Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I Qsearch I Call_Control 15 15 15 Serving Band Reporting Call_Control 3 3 3 Power Deviation(2dB) Call_Control 1 1 1 Power Deviation Indication Call_Control Yes Yes Yes MBR Call_Control 0 0 0 ECSC Call_Control No Yes NO .

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 52 Emergent Call Disable Call_Control No No No Special Access Control Call_Control Class 00000 00000 00000 Common Access Control Class Call_Control 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 Times 4 Times 4 Times Max Transmit Times of Call_Control Imm_Ass 2 2 2 Max Delay of Imm_Ass Call_Control Retransmit(ms) 4 4 4 Use Imm_Ass Call_Control Retransmit Parameter No No No N200 of FACCH/Full rate Call_Control 34 34 34 N200 of FACCH/Half rate Call_Control 29 29 29 N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23 23 N200 of SACCH Call_Control 5 5 5 N200 of Release Call_Control 5 5 5 N200 of Establish Call_Control 5 5 5 .

Use LAPDm N200 Call_Control No No No T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) Call_Control 60 60 60 T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) Call_Control 60 60 60 T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) Call_Control 200 200 200 T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) Call_Control 150 150 150 T200 FACCH/H(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50 T200 FACCH/F(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50 T200 SDCCH(5ms) Call_Control 60 60 60 RACH Min.Access Level(dbm) Call_Control -115 -115 -115 Random Access Error Threshold Call_Control 200 200 180 TRX Aiding Function Control Call_Control Allowed & Recover When Check Res Allowed & Recover When Check Res TRX Aiding Not Allowed Speech Version Call_Control 11 11 11 AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 52 24 24 64 .

Info. HO 30 30 30 TDD Better 3G Cell HO HO Allowed No No 0 TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Valid Time(s) 4 4 4 TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Watch Time(s) 5 5 5 TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO HO 50 50 50 TDD HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell HO 25 25 25 .AHR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) AFR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 32 24 24 48 Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Call_Control 75 75 85 Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable Call_Control Disable Disable Disable Paging Times Call_Control 2 2 4 RACH Busy Threshold Call_Control 16 16 16 SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms)) 24 24 31 T3105(10ms) HO 7 7 7 Max Resend Times of Phy.

TDD Inter-RAT HO Preference HO Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Quick Handover Offset(dB) HO 68 68 68 Quick Handover Punish HO Value(dB) 63 63 63 Quick Handover Punish HO Time(s) 10 10 10 Ignore Measurement Report Number HO 1 1 1 Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number HO 4 4 4 Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number HO 4 4 4 Quick Handover Last Time (0.5s) HO 3 3 3 Quick Handover Static HO Time(0.5s) 4 4 4 Quick Move Speed Threshold(m/s) HO 80 80 80 Quick Handover Down HO Trigger Level(dB) 63 63 63 Quick Handover Up Trigger Level(dB) HO 63 63 63 Inner Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold(%) 90 90 90 Number of Satisfactory HO Measurements(s) As per plan As per plan As per plan .

Total Number of Measurements(s) HO 5 5 5 Inter UL And OL Subcells HO Penalty Time(s) HO 5 5 5 Outgoing OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB) 25 25 25 Incoming OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB) As per frequency plan As per frequency plan As per frequency plan Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO(dB) HO Yes Yes 5 OL Subcell Load HO Diversity HO Period(s) 10 10 10 Load HO of OL Subcell HO to UL Subcell Enabled No No No Modified Step Length of UL Load HO Period(s) HO 1 1 1 Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO(dB) HO 5 5 5 UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Period(s) HO 5 5 5 Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries of HO UL And OL Subcells(dB) Distance Between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells(dB) Allowed Flow Control Level of UL And OL Subcell HO 2 2 2 HO 10 10 10 HO 10 10 10 UL Subcell Serious HO Overload Threshold(%) 90 90 90 .

UL Subcell General HO Overload Threshold(%) 1 80 80 Assignment Optimization of OL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not Assignment Optimization of UL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not No No No Yes Yes Yes UL Subcell Lower Load HO Threshold(%) 50 50 50 Better 3G Cell HO Allowed HO No No No 3G Better Cell HO Valid HO Time(s) 4 4 4 3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5 5 Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO HO 35 35 35 RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO HO 50 50 50 HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell HO 25 25 25 Inter-RAT HO Preference HO Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Cell By Threshold Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold Ps UtoO HO Received Level Threshold HO 35 35 35 Ps OtoU HO Received Level Threshold HO 25 25 25 ReceiveQualThrshAMR HO HR 60 60 60 .

ReceiveQualThrshAMR HO FR 65 65 65 En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Step HO 5 5 5 En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Period HO 5 5 5 En Iuo Out Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold 90 90 90 En Iuo Out Cell General HO OverLoad Threshold 85 85 85 En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold HO 30 30 20 MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail HO 3 3 3 Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) HO 10 10 10 Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) HO 40 40 40 Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) HO 10 10 10 Underlay HO Step Level HO 5 5 5 Underlay HO Step Period(s) HO 5 5 5 UtoO Traffic HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes UtoO HO Received Level Threshold HO 32 32 35 .

0 0 0 TA Pref. HO 63 63 63 Assign-optimum-level Threshold HO 35 35 35 Assign Optimum Layer HO System Optimization System Optimization System Optimization UO HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 4 4 UO HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5 5 TA Hysteresis HO 0 0 0 TA Threshold HO 63 63 63 RX_QUAL Threshold HO 50 50 60 RX_LEV Hysteresis HO 5 5 5 . Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC HO System Optimization System Optimization System Optimization TA Threshold of ImmeHO Assign Pref.OtoU HO Received Level Threshold HO 18 18 25 Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer HO Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell Pref. of ImmeAssign Allowed HO No No No TA Threshold of Assignment Pref.

RX_LEV Threshold HO 35 35 35 UO Signal Intensity Difference HO 0 0 0 TA for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed HO No No No RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes OL to UL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes UL to OL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO HO 80 80 80 RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO HO 4 4 3 K Bias HO 0 0 0 UL Expected Level at HO Access HO 30 30 30 Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) HO 40 40 40 Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO HO 30 30 30 Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. HO 6 6 6 .

on Candidate HO Cell 75 75 75 Load HO Threshold HO 85 85 85 System Flux Threshold HO for Load HO 10 10 10 ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60 DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60 ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65 .Forbidden time after MAX Times HO 20 20 20 MAX Consecutive HO Times HO 3 3 3 MS Fast-moving Time Threshold HO 15 15 15 MS Fast-moving Valid Cells HO 2 2 2 MS Fast-moving Watch HO Cells 3 3 3 Load HO Step Level HO 5 5 5 Load HO Step Period HO 10 10 10 Load HO Bandwidth HO 25 25 25 Load Req.

DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65 RXLEVOff HO 5 5 5 RXQUAL12 HO 50 50 50 RXQUAL11 HO 51 51 51 RXQUAL10 HO 52 52 52 RXQUAL9 HO 53 53 53 RXQUAL8 HO 54 54 54 RXQUAL7 HO 55 55 55 RXQUAL6 HO 56 56 56 RXQUAL5 HO 57 57 57 RXQUAL4 HO 58 58 58 RXQUAL3 HO 59 59 59 RXQUAL2 HO 60 60 60 RXQUAL1 HO 70 70 70 .

HO Allowed HO No No No Filter Parameter B HO 0 0 0 Filter Parameter A8 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A7 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A6 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A5 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A4 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A3 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A2 HO 10 10 10 Filter Parameter A1 HO 10 10 10 UL Qual.Cons. Threshold HO 60 60 60 .Ul Qual HO Limit HO 60 60 60 No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit HO 8 8 8 No Dl Mr.No Dl Mr. Threshold HO 60 60 60 DL Qual.

Emergency HO TA Threshold HO 255 255 255 DtxMeasUsed HO Open Open Open CfgPenaltyTimer HO 255 255 255 UmPenaltyTimer HO 10 10 10 RscPenaltyTimer HO 5 5 5 Filter Length for TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO NBR_RCVD_BLOCK 2 2 2 Penalty Time after HO AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s) 30 30 30 Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO REP_QUANT 2 2 2 Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO CV_BEP 2 2 2 Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP HO 6 6 6 Filter Length for SDCCH HO MEAN_BEP 2 2 2 .

Penalty Time after TA HO(s) HO 30 30 30 Penalty Level after TA HO HO 63 63 63 Penalty Time after BQ HO HO(s) 15 15 15 Penalty Level after BQ HO HO 63 63 63 Penalty Level after HO HO Fail 30 30 30 Filter Length for TA HO 6 6 4 Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV HO 6 6 4 Filter Length for SDCCH HO Qual 3 3 2 Filter Length for SDCCH HO Level 3 3 2 Filter Length for TCH Qual HO 6 6 4 Filter Length for TCH Level HO 6 6 4 Allowed M.of preprocessed MR HO Twice every second Twice every second Twice every second .R Number Lost HO 4 4 4 Min Power Level For Direct Try HO 25 25 16 Sent Freq.

Preprocessing HO No No No MS Power Prediction after HO HO No No No Penalty Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed HO No No No Min Interval for Emerg.Transfer BS/MS Power HO Class Yes Yes Yes Transfer Original MR HO Yes Yes No MR.HOs HO 6 6 4 Min Interval for Consecutive HOs HO 6 6 4 Min Interval for SDCCH HO HOs 2 2 2 Min Interval for TCH HOs HO 4 4 2 ATCBHoSwitch HO Open Open Open TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 TIGHT BCCH HO Watch HO Time(s) 3 3 3 Quick Handover Enable HO NO NO NO .

H2F HO Threshold HO 10 10 10 F2H HO Threshold HO 30 30 25 Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) HO 4 4 4 Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) HO 5 5 5 Intracell F-H HO Allowed HO Yes Yes YES Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell HO 15 15 15 Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell HO 10 10 10 Inter-layer HO Hysteresis HO 3 3 3 Inter-layer HO Threshold HO 25 25 25 Inter-System Handover HO Enable No No No PBGT Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 PBGT Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3 Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 Layer HO Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3 .

Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 Edge HO AdjCell Watch HO Time(s) 3 3 3 Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2 Edge HO Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3 Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold HO 20 20 20 Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold HO 10 10 10 Interference HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Concentric Circles HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes TA HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes BQ HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Fringe HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Level HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed HO No No No .

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed HO No No No Load HO Allowed HO No No No Intracell HO Allowed HO No No No SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No No Co-BSC/MSC Adj HO Yes Yes Yes PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0 0 TO Idle_Mode 0 0 0 ACS Idle_Mode No No No CRO(2dB) Idle_Mode 0 0 0 Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode No No No PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB 6dB Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) Idle_Mode 60 60 20 BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode 4 Multiframe Period 4 Multiframe Period 2 Multiframe Period .

BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 2 2 2 NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 11111111 11111111 11111111 Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode No No No Tx-integer Idle_Mode 32 32 32 ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes Timer for UL Data Forward(ms) Other_Properties 10 10 10 WaitforRelIndAMRHR Other_Properties 26000 26000 26000 WaitforRelIndAMRFR Other_Properties 34000 34000 34000 T3103C(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10 10 TREESTABLISH(ms) Other_Properties 15000 15000 15000 T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000 1000 T3109(ms) Other_Properties 27000 27000 27000 T8(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 .

T3121(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T3107(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T7(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 T3103A(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000 ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) Other_Properties 5000 5000 5000 T3101(ms) Other_Properties 3000 3000 3000 Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable Other_Properties No No No Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Other_Properties Enable No No No Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed Other_Properties No No No Qtru Signal Merge Switch Other_Properties No No No MAX Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period Average Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period Other_Properties 220 220 220 Other_Properties 180 180 180 Paging Numbers of one Other_Properties Optimizing Msgs 5 5 5 Interval For Sending Paging Optimizing Msgs Other_Properties 2 2 2 .

Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface Other_Properties Forced turn-on Forced turn-on Forced turn-on Interfere Band Stat Algorithm Type Other_Properties Interference Band Measurement Algorithm II Interference Band Interference Band Measurement Measurement Algorithm II Algorithm II Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes Lower-level sublink resources preemption Other_Properties switch No No No Sublink resources preemption switch Other_Properties No No No Force MS to Send Ho Access SWITCH Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes IntraCellHo to Ass SWITCH Other_Properties No No No Frequency Scan Result Other_Properties Type Maximum/Mean Value Maximum/Mean Value Maximum/Mean Value Drop Optimize IntraOther_Properties Cell Handover Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize IntraBsc Out-Cell Handover Other_Properties Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Resource Check Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize No MR Other_Properties For Long Time 1 1 1 .

Drop Optimize Forced Other_Properties Handover Failure 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Equipment Failure Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize ABIS Other_Properties Territorial Link Failure 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Release Other_Properties Indication 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention) Other_Properties 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO Other_Properties access fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error) 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited Other_Properties DM response) Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout) 1 1 1 Other_Properties 1 1 1 Directly Magnifier Site Other_Properties Flag No No No Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Other_Properties 15 15 15 .

Abis Flow Control Permitted

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Support Half Rate

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

No

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Other_Properties

5

5

5

PWRC

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

ActGene

Other_Properties

5

5

5

PS LowPri ServicePRI

Other_Properties

6

6

6

PS HighPRI ServicePRI

Other_Properties

4

4

4

CS Data ServicePRI

Other_Properties

5

5

5

CS Voice ServicePRI

Other_Properties

3

3

3

Included Angle(Degree)

Other_Properties

360

360

360

Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree)

Other_Properties

360

360

360

Average RACH Load Timeslot Number

Other_Properties

5000

5000

5000

Overload Indication Period

Other_Properties

15

15

15

CCCH Load Threshold

Other_Properties

80

80

80

CCCH Load Indication Period(s)

Other_Properties

15

15

15

Radio Resource Report Other_Properties Period(s)

10

10

10

Frequency Adjust Value

Other_Properties

36671

36671

36671

Frequency Adjust Switch

Other_Properties

NO

NO

NO

VSWR TRX Error Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

VSWR TRX Unadjusted Other_Properties Threshold

2

2

2

Power Output Reduction Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

Power Output Error Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

DC Bias Voltage Threshold

Other_Properties

3

3

3

Frame Start Time

Other_Properties

65535

65535

65535

Max RC Power Reduction(2dB)

Other_Properties

5

5

5

Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms))

Other_Properties

20

20

20

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 5 (-dBm)

85

85

85

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 4 (-dBm)

87

87

87

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 3 (-dBm)

92

92

92

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 2 (-dBm)

98

98

98

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 1 (-dBm)

105

105

105

Interf. Band Threshold Other_Properties 0 (-dBm)

110

110

110

Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold

Other_Properties

3

3

50

SMCBC DRX

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Data service Allowed

Other_Properties

118

118

118

Power boost before HO enabled or not

Other_Properties

StartUp

StartUp

not StartUp

Voice quality report switch

Other_Properties

report

report

not report

Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted

Other_Properties

255

255

Yes

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 8(dB)

Power_Control

53

53

53

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 7(dB)

Power_Control

50

50

50

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 6(dB)

Power_Control

47

47

47

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 5(dB)

Power_Control

43

43

43

Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22 22 .Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 12 12 12 Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 12 12 12 Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 22 22 22 HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 4(dB) Power_Control 40 40 40 HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 3(dB) Power_Control 30 30 30 HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 2(dB) Power_Control 20 20 20 HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 1(dB) Power_Control 0 0 0 HwIII UL MAX UpStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII UL MAX DownStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.

Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII UL RexLev Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII UL Rex Qual.Exponent Filter Length Power_Control 3 3 3 HwIII UL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length 3 3 3 HwIII DL MAX UpStep (dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII DL MAX DownStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8 8 HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.HwIII UL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold 20 20 20 HwIII UL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold 30 30 30 HwIII UL Rex Qual.Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6 6 HwIII UL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor 4 4 4 HwIII UL Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 Power_Control 12 12 12 Power_Control 16 16 16 .Upper Threshold(dB) HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual. Power_Control Lower Threshold(dB) 12 12 12 HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.

Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Power_Control Exponent Filter Length 3 3 3 HwIII DL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length 3 3 3 HwIII Traffic Channel Discard MR Number Power_Control 3 3 3 HwIII Signal Channel Discard MR Number Power_Control 1 1 1 .HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22 22 HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16 16 HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22 22 HwIII DL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold 25 25 25 HwIII DL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold 35 35 35 HwIII DL Rex Qual. Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII DL RexLev Slide Window Power_Control 1 1 1 HwIII DL Rex Qual. Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6 6 HwIII DL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor 6 6 6 HwIII DL Rex Qual.

Zone 1 Power_Control 4 4 4 AMR MAX Down Adj. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Power_Control Threshold 5 5 5 AMR MAX Up Adj. Power_Control 8 8 8 AMR MAX Up Adj. Zone 0 Power_Control 4 4 4 . Value Qual. PC Value by Qual. Value Qual. Value Qual. PC Value by RX_LEV Power_Control 16 16 16 AMR MAX Down Adj.HwIII Down Link Power Power_Control Control Adjust Period 3 3 3 HwIII Up Link Power Control Adjust Period Power_Control 3 3 3 HwIII Number of lost MRs allowed Power_Control 5 5 5 AMR BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16 AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Power_Control Threshold 5 5 5 AMR UL Qual. Power_Control 4 4 4 AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. Zone 2 Power_Control 4 4 4 AMR MAX Down Adj.

Power_Control 6 6 6 AMR Filter Length for UL Qual Power_Control 6 6 6 AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 6 6 6 . Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold 30 30 25 AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold 40 40 35 AMR UL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold 25 25 20 AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold 35 35 30 AMR DL MR.AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 AMR ULQual. Power_Control Compensation Allowed Yes Yes Yes AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 AMR MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 AMR UL MR. Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 AMR DL Qual.

Zone 0 Power_Control 4 4 4 DL MR.Value Qual.AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 6 6 6 AMR PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3 BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16 DL Qual. 8 8 8 MAX Up Adj. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 DL Qual.Zone 1 Power_Control 4 4 4 MAX Down Adj.Zone 2 Power_Control 4 4 4 MAX Down Adj. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0 UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5 5 MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.Value Qual.Value Qual. Power_Control 4 4 4 MAX Down Adj. PC Value Power_Control by Qual. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5 5 UL Qual. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 . PC Value Power_Control by RX_LEV 16 16 16 MAX Down Adj.

Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 25 20 . Lower Threshold Power_Control 2 2 3 UL Qual. Power_Control 5 5 5 Filter Length for UL Qual. Power_Control 5 5 5 Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5 5 Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5 5 Power Control Algorithm Switch Power_Control HWII Power Control HWII Power Control HW-II Power Control DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 0 1 DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 30 30 25 DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 40 40 35 UL Qual.UL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 2 2 0 MR. Compensation Allowed Power_Control Yes Yes Yes Filter Length for DL Qual.

UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 35 30 PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3 Constant of Filtering the Collision Signal Strength for Power Control Measured Receive Power Level Channel Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Data_In_PCU pdch pdch pdch BTS Power Attenuation on PBCCH Data_In_PCU -2dB -2dB -2dB Signal Strength Filter Period in Transfer Mode Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Signal Strength Filter Period in Idle Mode Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Initial Power Level Data_In_PCU 14 14 14 Alpha Parameter Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Maximum Value of N3105 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Maximum Value of N3103 Data_In_PCU 3 3 3 Maximum Value of N3101 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Release Delay of Downlink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 2400 2400 2400 Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 2000 2000 2000 .

Release Delay of Nonextended Uplink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 120 120 120 Load Reselect Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 40 40 40 GPRS Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 16 16 16 EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Cell Reselect Interval(s) Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Cell Normal Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit Cell Load Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit 2G/3G Cell Reselection Strategy Data_In_PCU Preference for 2G Preference for 2G Cell Cell Preference for 2G Cell Filter Window Size Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Allowed Measure Report Missed Number Data_In_PCU 4 4 4 .

GBR for POC Service Data_In_PCU 16 16 16 Min.Load Reselection Receive Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 60 60 60 Load Reselection Start Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 85 85 85 MS Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 30 30 30 MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold Data_In_PCU 200 200 200 Cell Penalty Last Time(s) Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Cell Penalty Level Data_In_PCU 30 30 30 Cell Reselection Hysterisis Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Min Access Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 15 15 15 Support QoS Optimize Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support PS Concentric Cell HO Strategy Data_In_PCU No handover No handover No handover between between between underlaid underlaid subcell underlaid subcell subcell and overlaid and overlaid and overlaid subcell subcell subcell 650 650 650 Transmission Delay of POC Service Data_In_PCU Max. GBR for POC Service Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support .

Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support Support Gbr QoS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support Downlink Default MCS Type Data_In_PCU MCS6 MCS6 MCS6 Downlink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED Uplink Default MCS Type Data_In_PCU MCS2 MCS2 MCS2 Uplink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED BEP Period Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Link Quality Control Mode Data_In_PCU LA LA LA Down TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Down TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 .

Downlink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS2 CS2 CS2 Downlink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED Up TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1 Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Up TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2 Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 Uplink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS1 CS1 CS1 Uplink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED Background Service Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 THP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 THP2 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 3 3 3 THP1 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 5 5 5 .

Timer of Releasing Idle Dynamic Channel Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of Concentric Cell Data_In_PCU Only convert at UL Only convert at UL only convert dynamic channel at UL PDCH Downlink Multiplex Threshold Data_In_PCU 80 80 80 PDCH Uplink Multiplex Threshold Data_In_PCU 70 70 70 Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Maximum Ratio Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 30 30 30 MultiBand reporting Data_In_PCU Report the frequencies of six strongest cells Report the frequencies of six strongest cells Report the frequencies of six strongest cells .ARP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 ARP2 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 3 3 3 ARP1 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Timer of Releasing Abis Timeslot Data_In_PCU 15 15 15 Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel Data_In_PCU All dynamic All dynamic All dynamic channels can be channels can be pre.channels can be pre-empted empted preempted.

Threshold of HCS Signal Strength Data_In_PCU -110dB -110dB -110dB Cell HCS Prior Class Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Maximum TX Power for Access PCH Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Minimum Receiving level for Access Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 Exclusive Access Data_In_PCU Not Exclusive Not Exclusive Not Exclusive Cell Access Bar Switch Data_In_PCU Permit Cell Access Permit Cell Access Permit Cell Access Accessorial Hysteresis of Cell Selection In New Routing Area Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB Cell Reselection Forbidden Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec Allow MS to Access to another Cell Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes Exceptional Rule for GPRS Reselect Offset Data_In_PCU 0 0 0 GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Applied to C31 Criterion or not Data_In_PCU c31standard c31standard c31standard GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB Support PSI Status Message Data_In_PCU No No No Allow MR Command or not Data_In_PCU No No No .

PSI1 Repetition Period Data_In_PCU 6 6 6 Persistence Level 4 Data_In_PCU 16 16 16 Persistence Level 3 Data_In_PCU 14 14 14 Persistence Level 2 Data_In_PCU 13 13 13 Persistence Level 1 Data_In_PCU 12 12 12 Extension Transmission Timeslots of Random Access Minimum Timeslots between Two Successive Channel Requests Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 4 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 3 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 2 Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 1 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 20 20 20 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Data_In_PCU 7 7 7 Access Control Class Data_In_PCU 0 0 0 PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 PAGCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 4 4 4 .

24sec 0.36sec Non-DRX Period Data_In_PCU 0.24sec 0.96sec 0.36sec 15.36sec 15.96sec 0.96sec Data_In_PCU 15.PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Transfer Mode Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Idle Mode Data_In_PCU 0.24sec GPRS Reselection Offset Data_In_PCU -2db -2db -2dB GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec GPRS Temporary Offset Data_In_PCU 10dB 10dB 10dB Extension MR Period Data_In_PCU 60sec 60sec 60sec Extension MR Type Data_In_PCU type1 type1 type1 Interference Frequency Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 NCC_PERMITTED Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Extension Measurement Command Data_In_PCU em0 em0 em0 BSS Paging Coordination Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes Support 11BIT EGPRS Access Data_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes .

Data_In_PCU 12 12 12 Pan Increment Data_In_PCU 4 4 4 Pan Decrement Data_In_PCU 2 2 2 BS_CV_MAX Data_In_PCU 10 10 10 Control Acknowledge Type Data_In_PCU Four access Four access pulses Four access pulses pulses by default by default by default Access Burst Type Data_In_PCU 8bit 8bit 8bit Max. Duration of DRX(s) Data_In_PCU 4 4 4s T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms Network Operation Mode Data_In_PCU Network Network Operation Network Operation Mode Mode II Operation Mode II II .Routing Area Color Code Data_In_PCU 1 1 1 Packet Access Priority Data_In_PCU Packet access of level 4 Packet access of level 4 Packet access of level 4 Support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on CCCH Data_In_PCU No No No Network Control Mode Data_In_PCU nc0 nc0 nc0 Pan Max.

the priority of the layer is high. This parameter specifies the base station color code. This parameter along with Layer of the Cell determines the priority of a cell. None This parameter specifies the network color code. This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer. numbered 1-4 respectively. For details. This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC). the priority is high. The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands. In addition. Micro. If a burst is incon Each layer has 16 priorities. It m The network has four layers. and Umbrella. This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. If the number of the layer is small. The network designed by Huawei has four layers: Pico. the priority is high. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC). None . The activation status can be Not Activated or Activated. The NCC is unique nationwide. for example. None This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. This parameter should be set as required. The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells fo None This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the Pb interface. 1. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. the cells at the same layer have the same priority. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. Generally. This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a cell. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. numbered 1-16 respectively. This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC). The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood.Description Configuration Policy This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. numbered 1-4 respectively. the MCC of China None is 460. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC. If this parameter is set to a small value. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. which is provided by the telecom operator. If the number of the priority is small. Macro. and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously. refer to Layer of the Cell. a packet control unit (PCU) None must be configured on the BSS side.

the main and diversity level cannot be None reported. If this parameter is set to the number of neighbor cells. or NC2. when the MS is in the packet transmission advance. NC1. the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status None message to the BSC. BTS3001C+. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0. EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a If this parameter is set to Yes. For example. it cannot None be changed.This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb No: In network control mode NC0. or NC2. GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS. this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report are more than 32 neighbor cells. NC1. A5/1. None Each routing area has an ID. This function has the following benefits: 1. the BSC reports the information about a maximum of 32 neighbor cells to the PC For the BTS3002C. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. Compared with GSM. When the CS service is set up. This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function. the BSC reports the This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells. The attenuation value has 50 levels. which improv None This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by an EDGE-enabled TRX. This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits Yes: In network control mode NC0. A5/2. Once the frequency band is selected. None In NC2. The function requires the support of the BSC. the default value is Invalid and cannot be manually modified. Each level attenuates by 0. information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there In the NACC and NC2 functions. or NC2. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system int This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell. the network informs (NACC) function. For other types of BTSs. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. The BSC sends th This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2) function. FH can be used to average the interferen None None None None The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. NC1. when the This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure. No. the MS of the system information about neighbor cells in In network control mode NC0. the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup and release. BTS3001C. the PS service is not disrupted. value 0 indic This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) function. when the This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change MS is in the packet transmission mode. When the cell is configured with the PBCCH. The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS service at the same time. mode. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Compared with the DTM function. The value of this parameter has eight bits. That is. A This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. If this parameter is set to Not FH. A5/3. . indicating that the MS has stored the system message.2 None dB. the default value is Support and can be manually modif This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. even if the TRX is configured with FH data.BTS22C and BTS20. the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells to the BSC. the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH.

the average call drop rate decreases. you must set the parameter based This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. TA equals 219. If this parameter is set to No. a This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell.This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). see GSM Rec. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. If this parameter is set to No. the TCHs (includi This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. the frequency. the handover success rate may be affected. None If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function. see GSM Rec. frame number. In a GSM cell. In this case. two subcells with different radiuses The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell can use form a concentric cell. different frequency reuse modes. thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. It is n None This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage. If this parameter is set to Yes. many subscribers may None fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. In This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details. 05. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. Theoretically. compare the receive level of the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology. In such a case. the required level of received signals is low. many MSs attempt to camp on the cell. that is. this parameter should be set to No. None None This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a concentric cell. system information.08. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage. None When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. None . the BSC can assign only an SDCCH None when receiving an initial access request. In this case. Due to the difference in coverage. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the UL subcell.08. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. 05. In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. a delay of about 120 This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. If the value of this parameter is too small. thus. it is not configured in the UL subcell. For details. This function has the following benefits: 1. Thus a call may drop. In directed retry. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell. concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL subcell. the OL subcell and the UL The concentric cell technology can be combined This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. Therefore. If this parameter is set to a too small value.

all the cells. TRXs. if you deactivate an activated BTS. not-activated and activated. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect. and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board. Conversely. This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link when None the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. The timeslots. all the cells. This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer.. This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS. the timeslots are automatically calculated and assigned. When the BTSs are cascaded. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect. and boards in this BTS will be activated. the lower-level BTS should be Generally. This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet. that is. The default value is calculated automatically. . however. This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS. the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. can be also manually assigned to meet the requirement of operators. This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML. None If you activate a not-activated BTS. None This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power None amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a None BSC. This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located. This parameter specifies the number of a subrack. This parameter specifies the TRX number.This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047 None None None This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. TRXs. This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The manually assigned OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when the timeslot is arranged. which must be unique in one BTS. the BSC assigns the Abis time slot of OML automatically. None This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. Cell Index must be unique in one BSC.

which are numbered from 0 to 31. Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC. The smaller this parameter is. versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF FH. BTS reduces. The macro BTS and the mini BTS support different power levels. and the range is 0-255. The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. when the antenna is over high and covers When this parameter is set to 0. this parameter specifies the number of the None timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface. If the forward ring of the BTSs functions. and the Out-BSC Port No. the smaller the transmit power is. When the BTS works in ring topology. however. The doublewhere the TRX serves does not perform FH. if the cell is not a concentric one. the conversion is allowed. the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly None . this parameter is set to None by default. 0-3 This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied E1 port. must be set to different E1 ports on the interface board. the cell including the timeslot FH and frame FH. This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied subrack. The FH can realize average interference and transceiver BTSs support the baseband FH and RF FH. each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports. This parameter specifies whether a cell can convert full rate channels to half rate channels. This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the semi-permanent link. frequency diversity. channels are allocated to the TRX with higher priority. The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s. The BTS3X of all This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used.For example. Level. In other similar conditions. For a concentric cell. The greater this parameter Adjust the cell coverage area by configuring the Power is. When the transmit power of a For different types of BTSs. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment algorithm. the indoor coverage becomes worse. If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface board. the In-BSC Port No. None This parameter specifies the TRX priority. the value range of this parameter is different. If this parameter is set to Yes. timeslot 0 is used for synchronization and cannot be otherwise used. too many cells. or convert the half rate channels to full rate channels. This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in None the TC subrack. This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX automatically for saving power when the BTS is powered by batteries after the external None power supply is cut off. When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board. if the parameter is set to No. This parameter specifies the power levels supported by a TRX. the higher the TRX priority is. even if the TRX is configured with FH data. None This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) in the BSC. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC timeslot occupied by the E1 port over the Abis interface. this parameter specifies the number of the port None occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface. Generally. but do not support This parameter specifies the transmit power level of the TRX. The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be forcedly restored. the tilt of the antenna first. This parameter is to be viewed only.This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is located. If this parameter is set to Not FH. the transmit power reduces by 2 dB. including the timeslot FH and frame FH. the conversion is not allowed. the forward and reverse links None share one number. you should lower the antenna and increase Each time this parameter increases by one level. this parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions. which is connected to the local subrack. the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest. If the forward ring of the BTSs functions.

and the attenuation between levels is 0. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. the corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity. the wireless link alarm parameter is sent. None None If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel None activation is less than or equal to this threshold.2 dB. BTS3012AE. otherwise. an abnormally release alarm is generated. the critical wireless link alarm is sent or not sent according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter. BTS3012II. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK signals. B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N (the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a timeslot that are activated). If the parameter is set to Yes. If the radio link prompt alarm is not cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period. This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a sub-channel that is activated). an abnormal release clear alarm is sent. Four None Diversity Receiver.This parameter specifies the power attenuation levels of the EDGE TRX. if the percentage of abnormally released If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel activation threshold of a timeslot. None None The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm. The RF receive mode can be Not Support. this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements. This parameter specifies the basic difference value caused by the specified level difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. the BTS detects the wireless link alarm. The BTS3012. None the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is generated. The uplink and downlink is not balanced only when the uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range. . There are 50 levels. The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm. The detection starts again until the next Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour). If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period. This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. the BTS stops None detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. None Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold. Starting from the period specified by this parameter. Independent Receiver. Together with Up Down Balance Floating Range. the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless None link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover Period. Thus. and sends an alarm related. Dividing Receiver. such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. the noNone traffic alarm is generated. or Main Diversity. such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent. This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX. Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm This parameter specifies the permissible uplink and downlink balance floating range relative to Up Down Balance Basic Difference. If this parameter is set to Yes. this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink None and downlink unbalance. BTS3006C. None the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent. For the latest S times of channel activation. This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to the BTS.

the signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX corresponding to one antenna. and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. No Combining.This parameter specifies the RF transmit mode of the TRX. This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the current TRX. None This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX. Diversity Transmitter. This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used. 1-HDLC. resulting in the failure of channel allocation. this parameter specifies the number of the RSL None timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port. If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions. This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC slot where the BSC interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. Diversity Transmitter. Power Booster Technology. which are numbered from 0 to None None If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value. it must be set to the number of the slot that is configured with the interface board. Thus. DPBT. DDIVERSITY This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface. the signals on certain frequencies are less affected by Rayleigh fading compared with those without antenna hopping. then the MS cannot receive the broadcast control messages from the main BCCH TRX properly. This parameter specifies the following: Currently. system information. The RF transmit mode can be Not Support. In some scenarios. the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be This parameter specifies whether the TRX supports antenna hopping. the number of the slot that holds the interface board. the frequency. None This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs None on a TRX. the cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the TRX output power. DDIVERSITY. when the BSC performs the static power control on the TRX. 2HDLC_HUB. you can infer that no None TRX supports the PBT together with the current TRX. If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions. That is. each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining. The Antenna Hopping Index corresponds to a TRX number. frame number. None Wide Band Combining. When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board. the number of the port on the interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC. this parameter specifies the number of the port None occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface. which connects the BTS to the BSC. None This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM. None This parameter is to be viewed only. In a GSM cell. or Transmitter Independent or Combining. When this parameter is set to the default value 255. the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different tributaries. That is. the step of increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2 dB. . or 3-IP. If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions. However. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC port where the BSC interface board is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or the antenna for the main BCCH TRX is faulty. This parameter is to be viewed only. Therefore. and the output power difference before and after the combination is not an integral multiple of 2 dB.

. this parameter is This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring network. This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU. This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set to Auto. There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and physical slot number. None This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power. When configuring RSL links. This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message. None The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell. None This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL signaling) is located. the handover success rate may be affected. None This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC transmission mode. When the Work Mode is set to Free-run. The in-BTS HDLC channel None connects to the BTS TMU. This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source. This function has the following benefits: 1.This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. set this parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM. None This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power None amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes. The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to Manual. This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too small value.

If this parameter is set to No. The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. If this switch is set to Yes. you must adjust the TRX configuration of the None None If this parameter is set to Yes. The BSC ignores the priority of PNone GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to this threshold.08. For details. and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. the average call drop rate decreases. this is not The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment. The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM.. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. None A5/5. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. 05. A5/2. this parameter should be set to No. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). see GSM Rec. you can infer This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. If a bit is set to 1. This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. That is. see GSM Rec. this is allowed to assign the channel. None The P/N criterion determines whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is None insufficient. If this parameter is set to No. A5/3.08. a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. If a bit is 0. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0. If the value of this parameter is too small. In directed retry. 05. you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. suppose the MS supports multiple sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. In this case. A5/6. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. This function has the following benefits: 1. thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. the BSC can assign only an SDCCH None when receiving an initial access request. None This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. you can infer that the BSS supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. PGSM frequency bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on. None This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power sharing algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold. the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. E-GSM. the BSC This parameter determines when the channel is assigned on the QTRU: When the channel is assigned on the QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing algorithm. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. Therefore. None The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is insufficient. In such a case. A5/4. A5/1. For details. the required level of received signals is low. many MSs attempt to camp on the cell.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required None power of cell. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage. otherwise. Thus a call may drop. The value of this parameter has eight bits. .This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side.

if this situation lasts N seconds. the situation must be recorded. When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU board exceeds the maximum permissible output power. Insufficient halfrate channels can be assigned to the MS. This parameter is valid for the concentric The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. the power sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. the TCHF or TCCH. During None the observation of P seconds. This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels and full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid None subcell and overlaid subcell. of busy TCHF + Num. the BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0. Thus. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. If this parameter is set to a higher value.This parameter specifies the following definitions: 1. This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. however. the full-rate or half-rate channel is preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource load. halfrate channels are assigned. the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously None multiplied by 10 times to prevent the floating-point values. During the observation of P seconds. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES. halfrate channels are assigned. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. the capacity of the BSC is reduced. the full-rate channel is preferentially assigned. When the static Abis resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%). The value is 0-1 in fact. the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels. this parameter is set to YES. the half-rate channel is preferred. that is. Otherwise. full-rate channels are assigned. the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. TCHH Prior channels are required in None the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC. Insufficient halfrate channels can be assigned to the MS. of busy TCHF + Num. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot -the lowest uplink signal strength of None this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels. In tight frequency resuse. the situation must be recorded. of available This parameter available TCHH /2) x dynamic TCHF + Num. the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot. the full-rate channel is preferred. The None parameter is valid for both built-in PCH and external PCU. 2. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. the capacity of the BSC is reduced. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell. full-rate channels are assigned. Otherwise. None None None When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis None Load Thred(%). and the percentage of seized TCHs . this parameter can be configured. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. This parameter specifies the QTRU signal merge algorithm. Thus. if this situation lasts N seconds. Thus. the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes. ofspecifies whether the100%. Otherwise. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. If the data configuration detects that the power sharing must be used. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell. 3. but the corresponding downlink power control of a cell is None If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels. The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. During the channel assignment. Static power sharing algorithm. Otherwise. Dynamic power sharing algorithm. HSN is permitted to be used.5 second. the situation must be recorded. The channel type to be assigned is decided according to the channel types that are allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell. of available TCHF + Num. this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the TCH. the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot. Channel seizure ratio = (Num.

Thus. The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement result.This parameter specifies whether the TCH/H is preferentially assigned on the basis of the channel type and current service channel seizure ratio that are allowed by the MSC. the history record priority is ineffective. the greater the signal is. and then This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH. This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed. the history record priority is effective. the TRX priority factor is effective. the lower the signal quality is. the judgment is imprecise. the burst influence may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a great value. the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. the network performance is If this parameter is set to a great value. If this parameter is set to a great value. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors. this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel assignment. If this parameter is set to a small value. the history priority of each channel is reduced by Update Freq. The higher the level. The greater the value. Usually. If this parameter is set to YES. the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. the influence of accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. The higher the level. the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to a great value. the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. and the system response is delayed. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate the signal quality on speech/data TCHs. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. . the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. Update Freq of CH Record is subtracted from the history priority of each channel to improve the priority of the channel. the lower the signal quality is. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to NO. the greater the signal is. During the channel assignment. you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs. When the Update Period of CH Record expires. The higher the level. the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes. That is. set this parameter to 2. If this parameter is set to YES. The greater the value. If this parameter is set to a small value. the TCHF or TCCH. the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. None None None If this parameter is set to a higher value. The greater the value. When this parameter is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to a small value. If this parameter is set to YES. the channel interference measurement is not performed None and the interference indication is not sent. the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors.of CH Record at the interval of the setting value of this parameter to increase the channel priority. The higher the level. the greater the signal strength is. the greater the signal strength is. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. If this parameter is set to a lower value. the judgment is imprecise. the lower the quality is. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level This parameter specifies whether the history record priority is considered in channel assignment. the process of updating the history record of channel occupancy is started. TCHH Prior channels are required in the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC. The signal quality on signaling channels should not be determined based on only one measurement result. and the percentage of seized TCHs The updating of the history record starts when the Update Period of CH Record times out. If this parameter is set to a small value. Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment. the channel interference measurement is performed. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed. If this parameter is set to a lower value. If this parameter is set None to NO. the lower the quality is. The greater the value. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference is existed. Principles of taking values are as follows: This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to determine the signal quality on signaling channels. Principles of taking values are as follows: Generally. If this parameter is None set to NO. the TRX priority factor is ineffective. the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference is existed.

and so forth. the CIR is 0. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the counter descreases by 3. the CIR is 1 dB. 1. If the number of idle SDCCHs > 8 + N1. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H). representing the lowest. If this parameter is set too small. and so forth. the forced handover may fail in the concentric cell. If RQI equals 1. Therefore. and 3. This parameter specifies the minimum time for the recovery of a TCH from an SDCCH.5 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 0. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. If this parameter is set too large. and so forth. the channel allocation If this parameter is set too small. If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a small number of requests for SDCCHs. and thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm. the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows: This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a half-rate channel when a call is initially established. the CIR is 1 dB. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. None None Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed be set to No. Yes: Open No: Close This parameter specifies whether the current cell supports the dynamic transmission diversity or dynamic PBT: 0: not supported 1: dynamic transmission diversity supported 2: dynamic PBT supported This parameter sets the priority of different types in channel allocation. if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle When the BSC determines whether to initiate the conversion from the TCH to the SDCCH. otherwise. it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion exceeds the Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum. the requests cannot The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. thus affecting the access of users. the SDCCHs in the cell may be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be initiated. high. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the BSC does not initiate the conversion. In a normal cell. Besides this parameter. the fullrate TCH is assigned preferentially. it cannot correctly indicate the idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the rollback of SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and affects the network performance. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH. this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference. This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH. If the number of SDCCHs exceeds the value of this parameter. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. If the number of idle SDCCHs in the cell is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter.5 dB. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. if RQI equals 2. the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. the counter is set to ResTime. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS. It is meaningless to set the parameter too large. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. the BSC tries to find a TCHF that can be converted to the SDCCH. 2. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. this field have four values 0. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. there is an None It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in multiband network. and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively. the SDCCHs of a cell are in idle state. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm.This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel assignment. the forced handover and call delay caused by timeslot arrangement can be avoided. If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is a large number of requests for SDCCHs. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. None By default. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The processing for the SDCCH recovered to the TCH is as follows: each cell is configured with a counter. low. If RQI equals 1.5 dB. if RQI equals 2. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. and so forth. None None None None . the CIR is 1 dB. the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially. In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm. If RQI equals 1. Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot arrangement can be performed in the cell. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. but there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because the timeslot arrangement is unavailable. if RQI equals 2. If this parameter is set to No. if the current channel seizure ratio reaches or exceeds this value. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. These types include: Capacity with a higher priority Quality with a higher priority PS coordination with a relatively higher priority This parameter specifies whether the combination of two half-rate TCHs into one fullrate TCH is allowed in a cell. This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm.

Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB.5 dB. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. If RQI equals 1.5 dB. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. If RQI equals 1.5 dB. if RQI equals 2. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2. One to four coding The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Therefore.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. the ACS does not include the coding rate. The five bits represent the coding rates from 7. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. If RQI equals 1. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 1 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is initially established. the CIR is 0. low. If RQI equals 1. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth.5 dB.5 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 1 dB. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. representing the lowest. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report.5 dB. the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. and so forth. If RQI equals 1. If RQI equals 1. and highest coding rates in the ACS respectively. the CIR is 1 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 0. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. if RQI equals 2. there is an This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. the CIR is 1 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. Otherwise. If RQI equals 1. and so forth. the CIR is 1 dB. and so forth. and 3. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the coding rate is included in the ACS. and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 1 dB. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. None None None None .5 dB. the CIR is 1 dB. wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. the CIR is 1 dB. If RQI equals 1. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H). The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB. if RQI equals 2. If RQI equals 1. this field have four values 0. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. if RQI equals 2.75 kbit/s (from left to right). The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. and so forth. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the CIR is 1 dB. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. and so forth. high. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. and so forth. The value of this parameter has five bits. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. if RQI equals 2. 1. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. if RQI equals 2. and so forth. 2.5 dB. the CIR is 0. If RQI equals 1. If RQI equals 1. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. there is an None None None None None None None None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS.40 kbit/s to 4. If a bit is 1.

Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency None None None None None None None None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. If RQI equals 1. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call.5 dB. after receiving the assignment failure message from the MS on the SDCCH. there is an This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. If this parameter is set to Yes. and so forth. and so forth. if RQI equals 2. In satellite transmission mode. The value of this parameter has eight bits. This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an None MS when the Abis resources are insufficient. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. and so forth. Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. This. This parameter specifies the maximum number of reassignments after the assignment on the Um interface fails. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. the CIR is 0. If RQI equals 1.5 dB. thus improving the response speed of the on the signaling processing rate. the CIR is 1 dB. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. if RQI equals 2. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 1 dB. if RQI equals 2. if RQI equals 2. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. MSs cannot receive short messages.5 dB.5 dB. If receiving short messages is allowed. For terrestrial network. disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls. the call completion rate of MSs is increased and the QoS of the network is improved. and so forth. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is different from what is used in the original assignment. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI.5 dB. the CIR is 0. this messages. wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. the coding rate is included in the ACS. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the CIR is 0. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB. If RQI equals 1. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2. and so forth. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH function. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. In normal assignment procedure. the CIR is 1 dB. When this parameter is set to Yes. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. transmission. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.75 kbit/s (from left to right). the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS. and so forth. the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately. the CIR is 1 dB. If RQI equals 1.5 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. this function can be enabled The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission to accelerate the signaling processing rate. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased. if RQI equals 2. In specific cells. Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during This parameter specifies whether to disable the sending of point-to-point short an upgrade. If RQI equals 1. the CIR is 0. if RQI equals 2. the default value of this parameter is No.2 kbit/s to 4. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. Otherwise. If RQI equals 1. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 1 dB. To improve the success rate of reassignment. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If a bit is 1. sending point-to-point short messages on the downlink is parameter must be set to No. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. the CIR is 1 dB. the CIR is 0. the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the . it is recommended that the default value Different Band be used. and so forth. the CIR is 1 dB.Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. Instead. the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um interface. however.5 dB. One to four coding If this parameter is set to a great value. if RQI equals 2. the ACS does not include the coding rate. That is. If RQI equals 1.5 dB. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. and so forth. The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12. there is an Based on the RQI in the call measurement report. increases the load of the BSC. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. the CIR is 0. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS.

and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when network resources are occupied. the 3G cell joins in the cell priority This parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell.08. For details. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm. level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm to -37 dBm. The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A. it adds the value of this parameter to the received signal level. the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization. Priorities 0-4 are used for subscribers all over the world. After the measurement report is filtered. and then converts the result into the RXLEV value. If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in connection mode. When the receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter. After the valid measurement report is filtered. see GSM Rec. the BSC initiates a reassignment when receiving an assignment failure message from the Um interface. If the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter. when preemption occurs. the network can use different policies such as queuing. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell. For example: If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5. This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a GSM900 cell. If the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter. preemption. the measurement report is valid. and 0-4). the measurement report is valid. When sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency band. the value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. the MS with the lowest This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function. This helps to improve the call completion rate and the QoS of the network. After the measurement report is filtered. the measurement report is valid.This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) function. If there are a large number of assignment failure messages. 0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable) 1: -28 dB 2: -24 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about an FDD cell is valid. A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the serving cell. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be contained in the None best cell list or in the measurement report. the MS starts to search for 3G cells. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a DCS1800 cell is valid. the cell joins in the cell priority sequence. the This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR. if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0. it is recommended that the value of this parameter be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report. This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell is valid. When the priority of a GSM900 cell is sequenced on the basis of its frequency band. the BSC None None None None None None None None None . When the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced. After the valid measurement report is filtered. In eMLPP. The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement None report is greater than the value of this parameter. the cell joins in the cell priority rank. B. Add the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement None report. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a GSM900 cell is valid. The two highest priorities are reserved only for local use in the network. 15]. If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented. the If this parameter is set to Yes. and then sequence the TDD cells. the value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. 05. In connection mode. 7] or above [8.

the MS None starts to search for 3G cells. power class must be correctly If the A5/4-7 encryption algorithm is used. The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. the MS reports the It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter. Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set to EMR.08. Only when the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin. None This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in packet transfer mode. see GSM Rec. This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell. the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell. In idle mode. this parameter can be set on the basis of the traffic volume on each frequency band. 7] or above [8. assignment. the MS starts to search for 3G cells. the 3G cell can be one None candidate cell for cell reselection. For example: This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell reselection. This parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power. RSCP. None 15]. see GSM Rec.After a successful immediate this parameter be set to Yes. if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0. 0: -20 dB 1: -6 dB This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be contained in the None best cell list or in the measurement report. 15]. In the inter-band handover. 04. the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as For a 1800 MHz cell in the dual-band network. It maps with C/I in GSM. the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on different frequency bands. These neighbor cells must meet the following requirements: When Power Deviation Indication is set to Yes.08. This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands. 7] or above [8. it is recommended that classmark sending. None This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode. if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0. The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains the power information of each recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. band of multi-band MSs.This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information about a cell with None an invalid BSIC. For details. it is possible. For example: If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5. If this parameter is set to 0. the transmit power of an MS is the MS maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if None the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band does not receive the original power command after random access. it is . In packet transfer mode. Received Signal Code Power Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the serving cell. When the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency band with the serving cell. a maximum of the value of Serving Band Reporting can be reported. Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to search for a 3G cell when the BSIC must be decoded. measurement results of six neighbor cells known and permitted by the NCC at the bands with the best signal The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early For a 900/1800 MHz CoBCCH cell. 05. None In a multiple band network. For details. None 0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable) 1: -28 dB 2: -24 dB This parameter specifies the threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in connection mode before Qsearch C is obtained. the If the system information indicates "MBR".

thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure. When this number is reached. This parameter is used for load control.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a halfrate channel). In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. For MSs whose access class is from 0 to 9. the immediate assignment message is dispatched and retransmitted. None This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes. the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is not sent. see GSM Rec.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multiframe release. If this parameter is set to Yes.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate assignment message. This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of special access classes to access the network.08. the BTS should resend the I frame. emergency calls are not allowed only when the access control bit is set to 0 and Emergent Call Disable is set to Yes. the immediate assignment message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not exceeded. the BTS should resend the I frame. the message is not dispatched or retransmitted. radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed.This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame. 0000000001 indicates that the MSs of all classes except class 0 are allowed to access the network. see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is sent. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes. If this parameter is set to a too small value. if this parameter is set to No. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS.For example. If this parameter is set to a small value. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed. If this parameter is set to a too great value. Within the period specified by this parameter. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. Each time This parameter specifies whether to allow emergency calls. the counter S decreases by 1. It is recommended that this parameter be not used. this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. Each time an SACCH message is not decoded. If this parameter is set to a great value. If the parameter is set to No. the BTS should resend the I frame. and therefore resource usage is low. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS. the BTS should resend the I frame. If this parameter is set to a too small value. For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15. congestion may occur This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of common access classes to access the network. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. This parameter takes effect on the downlink. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. It is recommended that this parameter be not used. 0408 and 05. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high. emergency calls are allowed. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. the BTS should resend the I frame. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. For details of this parameter. see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. the put-through rate of MS None This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment retransmission parameter to the BTS. a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call. the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH. it is recommended this parameter If this parameter is set to a too great value. thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. For example. If the MS detects errors in an I frame. If the parameter is set to Yes. None None None None None .This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a fullrate channel). see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. the function is not obvious. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. This parameter is used for load control. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter. see the descriptions of the Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. the function is not obvious. 000001 indicates that users of all classes except class 10 are allowed to access the network. Otherwise. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure. This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low.

For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. the speech quality is improved. SAPI0 maps with speech services. full-rate version 3. According the GSM protocols. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement For the BTS3X in 03.Access Level. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHF over the Um interface. the speech quality is improved. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). full-rate The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities.30000. half-rate version 1. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. the number of data retransmissions is reduced Generally. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER).This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS. BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions . the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. It is set according to the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS access level. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end.04. this parameter is set to 1. If this parameter is set to Yes. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. the BTS regards this access as an invalid one and no decoding is performed. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. Access Level. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. the BSC If timer T200 is set to a too small value. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. the AMR coding This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. If the receive level of the RACH burst is smaller than the value of RACH Min. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden after the faulty TRX is restored. and SAPI3 maps with short message services. the AMR function is enabled. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. The value of this parameter has six bits. and SAPI3 maps with short message services. this parameter specifies the level threshold for the random access of the MS.Access Level.1130 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200 parameter.0529 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal TRX in this cell. Allowed & Recover Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is This parameter specifies the speech version supported by the BSC. For supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. the system determines whether the received signal is the random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41 bits) and calculates the TA value. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the SDCCH. SAPI0 maps with speech services. For supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the receive level of the RACH burst is greater than the value of RACH Min. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. None The six bits (from the most significant bit to the least significant bit) indicate the following speech versions respectively: half-rate version 3. If this parameter is set to No. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. The data link layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error data link. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. the AMR function is enabled. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over the Um interface. see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)). the allowable error for the random access signal is high and an MS can easily access the network. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control: TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled. the AMR coding This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SDCCH over the Um interface. But the error report rate is high. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter. RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than RACH Min. If details. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. the BTS considers that an This parameter specifies the correlation between training sequences. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If timer N200 is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3 services. If this parameter is set to a too great value. half-rate version 2. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. the error report rate of the MS is low but the MS cannot easily access the This parameter specifies whether to enable the TRX aiding function. the transmit end may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If details. see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer T200 is set to a too small value.

If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report. the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered. 08. For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24). the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. The greater the value of this parameter. The total paging times is approximately equal to this parameter multiplied by the paging times configured on the MSC side. For details.58 and 04.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS. an alarm is generated. the This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. it is difficult to select candidate target target cells. the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message. the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS to a TDD 3G cell. The greater the value of this parameter is set. this parameter only indicates whether the timeslot is busy. this parameter must be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of the BTS and the minimum access level of the MS to ensure the balance between the uplink and the downlink. This parameter specifies the total number of paging times. According to the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion. the AMR function is enabled.If the The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission. For the BTS3X series and the double-transceiver BTSs. If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms. .08. If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the speech quality is improved. The maximum times for This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions. the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. the speech quality is improved. When the BTS receives the SACCH measurement report from the MS. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell. The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH If the value of the parameter is too high. the 2G cell handover is preferred. a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. If For details. this parameter specifies the level threshold for the MS random access when the BTS determines the RACH busy state.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied. the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. the 3G cell handover is preferred. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS. BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The greater the value of this parameter is set. If the value of the than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate parameter is too low. When the receive level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold. Under the same frame erasion rate (FER). congestion may occur. if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. see the description of SACCH multi-frames. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS. When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes. The BSC does not support the mechanism for For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. the AMR coding This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls. If For details. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. the counter for determining whether a radio link is faulty is set to the value of this parameter. The greater the value of this parameter is set. The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. The parameter and the paging times configured on the MSC side together determine the number of retransmissions of the paging message. heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that When target cells are selected during direct retry. None Properly setting this parameter can increase the paging success rate. The load of the cell is greater than or equal to Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER). the AMR coding This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls. The This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of radio link connection failure. Each time the BTS fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS. cells. the cells with This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. This parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST If the value of this parameter does not match with the value supported by the BTS. see the description of SACCH multi-frames. a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. At present. the AMR function is enabled. The physical information is sent over the FACCH. If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed parameters are set to Yes. only the cells whose loads are smaller the handover does not make sense. the BTS starts the timer T3105. see GSM Rec. the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). After receiving the message. the Paging Times is set to 4 in the MSC. which can also be a handover failure message. the counter decreases by 1. if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the directed try procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports directed try. Otherwise. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1.The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding.

The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. the filtered This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the value is more accurate. the BSC first selects the target This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a handover cell from the 2G candidate cells. a fast handover is triggered. serving cell after a successful fast handover. if the triggering conditions difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered. inaccurate. If this During a measurement period. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. but the time delay is longer. if the MS moves at a speed greater than the value of this None parameter. is set to Preference for 3G Cell. but the time delay is longer. None . in the UL subcell is increased. the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells. During a measurement period. If this BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell from the BTS. if this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell. original serving cell after a successful fast handover. if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter. the period during which difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered. a fast handover occurs only if the difference of path loss between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater than or equal to the value None of this parameter. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports when the BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. a fast handover is triggered. if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. Such a period is within the value defined by this parameter. If this parameter is set to a small value. None None During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network. the more This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. the filtered This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the value is more accurate. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a small value. The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. If this parameter is set to a too great value. This helps to parameter is set to a too small value. the filtered value is avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report. if the compensated downlink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter.During a handover decision. if If this parameter is set to a too small value. thus leading to This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level of the ping-pong handovers. that is. a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered. If this parameter is set to a too great value. During a measurement period. During a measurement period. of fast handover is met for a period longer than or equal to the value of this parameter. and no fast handover decision is made. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the filtered value is avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report. This helps to parameter is set to a too small value. the more This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The greater the value of this parameter is set. a fast handover is triggered. That is. the triggering conditions of fast handover are met. That is. If this parameter 3G cell. the traffic load the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload Threshold. the corresponding handover decision is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB. thus leading to This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the original ping-pong handovers. The greater the value of this parameter is set. no filtering is performed handover. If this parameter is set to a too great value. a fast handover is triggered. inaccurate. If this BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell from the BTS. According to the P/N criterion. That is. the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. If the number of received measurement This parameter can only be applied to the fast-moving reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter.

thus speeding up the load handover. The greater the value of this parameter is. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). The decision condition for a handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is as follows: SS(s) . None If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload threshold. the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period. If this parameter is set to a too great value. period. The greater the value of this parameter is set. this parameter should be decided before the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. The greater the value of this parameter is set.SS(n) < Distance between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells . the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered. the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the If this parameter is set to a too great value. no handover can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too great value.According to the P/N criterion. . If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general overload threshold. After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. the system flow In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL load is increased. None None This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. congestion may This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled. the larger the blank zone is. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter. This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. Subcell Lower Load Threshold. all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. load the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is load is not allowed. adversely affected. the system flow load is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value. all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. which specifies the size of blank zone between the UL subcell and the OL subcell. the system flow value of this parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO load is increased. the boundaries of the OL and UL subcells are determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of None If this parameter is set to a too small value. the system flow load is increased. the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered. Thus. If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased.Distance Hysterisis Between Boudaries of This parameter is a relative value. For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm. if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. Thus. congestion may occur in the target To prevent ping-pong handovers. This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. the corresponding handover decision is triggered.

a 3G better cell handover is triggered. the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. Moreover. If this parameter is set to a too small value. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10. The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. the BSC This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate 3G cell. The greater the value of this parameter is. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell general overload threshold. the more met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. Moreover. some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. the 2G cell handover is preferred. the BSC This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL subcell None to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm. If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell. the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. In an enhanced dualband cell.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). Otherwise. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes. difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70. the more met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. a 3G better cell handover is triggered. if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are The greater the value of this parameter is set. the MS that sends the channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. None None If this parameter is set to a too great value. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter. If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold. The greater the value of this parameter is set.If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell. During the handover decision: If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. According to the P/N criterion. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold. the 3G cell handover is preferred. a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier for the BSC to hand over the MS to an FDD 3G cell. cells. if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are The greater the value of this parameter is set. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. None . and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell. If this parameter is set to a too great value. This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general overload threshold. According to the P/N criterion. This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell None to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm. difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. The greater the value of this parameter is set. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold. This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied. the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.

The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70. After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails. all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. If this parameter is set to a too small value. When this parameter is set to Yes. the traffic load If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter. OtoU HO Received Level Threshold. the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy. None If this parameter is set to a too great value. the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. and TA Hysteresis. If this parameter is set to a too great value. corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10. the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell. None This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell. it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO to avoid ping-pong handovers. When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter.This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the UL subcell handover. when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails. the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed. and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic. the calls are hierarchically handled from level 63 to 0. the calls in the cell are handed over to the target cell by level. If handover penalty is enabled. some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell. . This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. calls with lower level may be handed over first. This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by UtoO HO Received Level Threshold. the call can still be handed over to the subcell to OL subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. None This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. Thus. This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than or equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold. If the call is in the OL subcell and if the OL to UL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes. Therefore. in the OL subcell is increased. The value of this parameter is the time This parameter determines whether the traffic load in the UL subcell determines the UL subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced concentric cell. the call cannot be handed over from the None OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail. the traffic load If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with higher RX level from the UL subcell to OL subcell. RX_QUAL Threshold. thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. During the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. the UL imposed. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold. the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail. no the BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is Time after UtoO Fail. the This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. Otherwise. the calls with higher receive level can be handed over to the OL subcell first. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the call cannot be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. in the UL subcell is increased. This does not conform to the principle that the call of the best quality should be handed over preferentially. When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0. When multiple requests for the UL-to-OL handover are sent simultaneously. TA Threshold. If this parameter is set to 0. and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic. congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step Period. previous target cell after the penalty time. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm. That is. Therefore. If this parameter is set to a too great value.

a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. the BSC determines which service layer should be preferentially selected. Therefore. the channel assignment for an incoming-BSC handover can be processed in one of the following modes: Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned. the BSC compares the measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold. and TA Hysteresis. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold. a channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. a concentric cell handover is triggered. Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. Otherwise. #N/A None Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in the channel request message during an immediate assignment. RX_LEV Hysteresis. TA Threshold. In this case. RX_QUAL Threshold. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. the current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. and determines the preferred service layer. an intra-BSC incoming cell handover request can be processed in one of the following modes: System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. the TCH in the OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the MS because no TA is lower than this threshold. RX_LEV Hysteresis. TA Threshold. Then. #N/A One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes. RX_QUAL Threshold.. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold. is set to 0. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell. For a dual-band network (for example. Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. . Underlaid Subcell: The TCH in the UL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. According to the P/N criterion. RX_QUAL Threshold. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. If TA Pref.This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. The greater the value of this parameter is set. Then. If TA Pref. the current receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No. the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered. Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment In a concentric cell. a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. According to the P/N criterion. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10. Assign Optimum Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell. In a concentric cell. the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of comparing the uplink receive level on the SDCCH and In a concentric cell. UtoO HO Received Level Threshold. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. the recommended value of this parameter is Underlaid Subcell. For the network with a single frequency band. the TCH can be assigned in the following modes: System Optimization: Based on the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. and TA Threshold. RX_LEV Threshold. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis. Then. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization. if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. RX_QUAL Threshold. 900/1800 MHz cells). and TA Hysteresis. inter-BSC handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells. None None The greater the value of this parameter is set. a concentric cell handover is triggered. the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and AssignIf the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. and TA Hysteresis. RX_LEV Hysteresis. if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. If TA Pref. incoming BSC handovers occur None None None When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. TA Threshold.

The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. None This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover. RX_LEV Hysteresis. and avoiding This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO. or None Pico layer. None This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is enabled. the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold. This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking. Generally. determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers. increasing the transmit power of the MS. None This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. it is set to 0. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH. and TA Hysteresis. Only when the MS is located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro. Micro. This parameter. the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher None than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter are regarded as consecutive handovers. you are advised to subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover. This parameter specifies the penalty value. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion Loss Difference + Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas + Pass Loss Difference of Different Frequencies. RX_QUAL Threshold. None This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled. together with Forbidden time after MAX Times. Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not located at the fourth layer. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover.This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on the new channel after handover. Micro. This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. This parameter affects the ranking of candidate cells. Measure the receive level of the UL subcell and OL subcell at several different places if the UL subcell and OL subcell use different antennas. If this parameter is set to a too small value. The adjacent cells must be located at the Macro. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors. the downlink receive quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. This parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in Huawei II power control algorithm. If an MS is moving fast. None This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No. the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where the MS is located. Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. This parameter specifies the expected uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS is handed over to a new cell. The recommended number of This parameter specifies whether the TA is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover. Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer. TA Threshold. penalty is performed. . This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after HO. call drop may easily occur. None Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle.

and FID queuing load. the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level for every Load HO Step Period. The threshold equals 2r/v. If it is set to a too small value. the MS is regarded as moving slow. If it is set to a too small value. If multiple consecutive intra-cell handovers occur. uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells. Threshold. Load handover is allowed only when the system flow is lower than the setting of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too small value. greater than the value of this parameter. When the load of the cell is equal to or greater than the Load HO Threshold. the cell rejects the MSs handed over from other cells. Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires. The system flux level is the current flux control level of the system. the system traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively. if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells. The load handover is triggered when the traffic load in a cell is greater than the value of this parameter. the hierarchical handover algorithm for load handover each level is long. If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter. The more the micro cells are configured. is used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by levels. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers allowed. the load handover is triggered when the ratio of TCHs occupied in a cell reaches the threshold defined for load handover. the number of load handovers increases. If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified threshold. the The more the micro cells are configured. If it is set to a lower value. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS handover of AMR HR calls. the the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. the cell can receive the MSs handed over from other cells. all the calls served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously. The setting of this parameter determines the maximum Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV width of the handover strip during load handover. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. the smaller the value of this parameter is (the required velocity is higher). 0 indicates the lowest level and 11 indicates the highest level. triggered. Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth). This parameter triggered. a This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover. is greater than the value of this parameter. The The setting of this parameter affects the width of the handovers are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the handover strip during load handover. Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth) are handed off the current serving cell. range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. the load on the system is increased. for a certain period. If it is set to a too small value. the number of handover requests that are rejected increases. . the greater than the value of this parameter. When the cell radius is fixed. Therefore. the more difficult According to the P/N criterion. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this threshold.When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed. the intra-cell handover may not be timely. The value of this parameter should not be set too high. starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. 0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is handover of AMR HR calls. the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. The traffic load of a cell refers to the TCH seizure rate in the cell. corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. In other words. the MS is regarded as moving fast. and the load on the CPU The setting of this parameter affects the load handover will increase rapidly as a consequence. the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. When Load HO Allowed is set to Yes. the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. In some cases. the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period. the system resources may be wasted when intra-cell handovers occur frequently. If it is set to a too greater value. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the load handover. The setting of this parameter affects the load handover targeted to the cell. The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v). call drops may occur due to traffic time. CPU load. Load HO Threshold should be set to 85. Otherwise. Where. System flux thresholds correspond to the system flux obtained based on message packets. the more the difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered. Otherwise. a load handover is allowed. Otherwise. According to the P/N criterion. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. the more difficult BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. The setting of this parameter is dependent on the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold parameter. if this In hierarchical load handover. If it is set to a lower value. the handover time of congestion in the cell. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is handover of AMR FR calls. This parameter the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. if this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too great value.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the is greater than the value of this parameter. downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the receive quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold. For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference If the receive level of the serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small value. This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 56 to 58, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 53 to 55, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 49 to 52, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 46 to 48, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 42 to 45, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 39 to 41, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 36 to 38, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 32 to 35, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. set to a too small value. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.

If the number of consecutive measurement reports without If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement the downlink measurement report is greater than the value report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision of this parameter, the handover decision related to no related to no downlink measurement report is allowed. downlink measurement report is not performed. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this measurement report emergency handover is triggered. parameter. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially value, the no downlink measurement report handover selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available cannot be triggered. This parameter is used to control the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm. If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is This parameter is set according to the traffic volume. disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is not allowed in this cell. This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. This parameter indicate specifies the drop trend of the receive level within a period. If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required for drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover. triggering a rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter Parameters A1 to A8. This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the the receive level drops rapidly. configured value): This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold. uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold. downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell

An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be selected. This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to data configuration.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to the Um interface error.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to cell congestion. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR) handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch. The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHFH HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the TCH REP_QUANT. By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.

This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA emergency handover. In the areas with small space between BTSs and densely distributed BTSs, the coverage of the cell can be reduced if this parameter is set to a lower value. When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report indicates that DTX is not used, the FULLSET values should be selected. When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the SUBSET values should be selected. In latter cases, the If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH REP_QUANT. SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding duration for the MS. the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH. parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. modified. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for This parameter should be set to a small value because the averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH. parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. modified. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for This parameter should be set to a small value because the averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH. SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding duration for the MS. the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.

When the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this parameter. During the penalty time. and the system response is delayed. This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO. Thus. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. the flow on the Abis interface is increased. This parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty Time after BQ HO. the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed according to two consecutive MRs that are lost. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time. other cells are given higher priority This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. If this parameter is set to a lower value. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of this parameter. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. all previous measurement reports are discarded and the handover may fail. this adjacent cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during interpolation. A penalty level is imposed on a target cell to avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of the following reasons: cell congestion. If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to the BSC. the network performance is degraded. 110 dBm to -47 dBm. . If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH. the receive level of the This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell. For example.This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell after an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed. and the system response is delayed. After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells. the network performance is Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the signal strength in the serving cell is poor. other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. If this parameter is set to a lower value. When this parameter is set to a higher value. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. If this parameter is set to a higher value. other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. a message indicating When this parameter is set to a higher value. Thus. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. and the system response is delayed. You can set this parameter to average the TA value in multiple MRs. If the receive If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter. the BTS sends preprocessed MRs to the BSC every 0. If this parameter is set to a lower value. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. When this parameter is set to an excessive value. Thus. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. and the system response is delayed. the network performance is degraded. the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate and flow on the Abis interface. Therefore. Thus. Thus. Thus. After preprocessing the MRs. If the preprocessed MR is sent at a high frequency. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. a message indicating internal handover refusal is received. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the timing advance. Huawei This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the channel quality on the SDCCH. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. If this parameter is set to a lower value. If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. Thus. This parameter specifies the penalty on the signal strength of the original serving cell to avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC. if this parameter is set to Twice every second. the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. This parameter specifies the degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. The level values 0 through 63 map to be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry.5 second. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover decision. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. When this parameter is set to a higher value. the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell. the network performance is degraded. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA. the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on a target cell. thus leading to ping-pong handovers. the impact of sudden changes is reduced. the adjacent cell can equal to the value of this parameter.

This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled. A timer starts after a handover is complete. parameter should be set to No. you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover. a penalty is performed you need to disable the penalty for a certain handover. you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed This parameter can be used to avoid unwanted handovers After a new TCH is assigned to an MS. but the network interference is reduced. on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell. This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. set the related penalty time and penalty level to 0. In addition. No handover is allowed during the minimum interval. and concentric cell handovers) that require power compensation may fail. If this parameter is set to a too small value. When this parameter is set to NO. the BSC preprocesses the measurement reports. This parameter is set to NO if power control is performed by the BSC. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the timer expires. the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. specified by this parameter. the MS does not use the maximum transmit power. the BTS should send the preprocessed MR and timeslots configured in SDCCH/8 scheme. the MS can be handed over to another channel inaccurate measurement reports generated in the initial only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period phase of call establishment. After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS. handovers cannot be performed timely. the handovers (such as PBGT BTS to the BSC. frequent handovers cannot be avoided. load handovers. When the conditions for an emergency handover are met. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval. handovers cannot be performed timely. It can decrease the interference. If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails. The ATCB handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL None subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. Transfer BS/MS Power Class. BCCH HO. When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad. This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report In 4:1 multiplexing mode. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. the UL and DL balance measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the set to No. then this the original MR to the BSC. the signaling on the Abis If this parameter is set to Yes. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the Transfer Original MR. the MS can be handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned. if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality. When this parameter is set to YES. and thus the handover success rate is decreased. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side. the MS can be handed over to another channel due to inaccurate measurement reports in the initial phase only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period of call establishment. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. This parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by the BTS. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. The parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers. an emergency handover timer is started. This parameter is used to avoid unwanted handovers due to After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS. specified by this parameter. if there are more than two to the BSC. In this case. and Sent Freq. 1: YES None . According to the P/N criterion. frequent handovers cannot be avoided.of preprocessed MR parameters are invalid. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side. the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. BCCH HO. This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH handover is allowed. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency handovers.When MR preprocessing is enabled. ping-pong handovers are likely to This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover. 0: NO. If this parameter is set to a too great value. improve the conversation quality. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to Yes. If the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad. and a subsequent handover is allowed only after the timer expires. handovers. This parameter determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. and achieve the aggressive According to the P/N criterion.

if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an adjacent cell. if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. the more difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the configured H2F HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter does not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover. an unwanted cell may become the target cell. This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. the more handover is triggered. difficult the AMR handover can be triggered. This leads to None Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N The greater the value of this parameter is set. the more handover is triggered. That is. the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered. the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. The greater the value of this parameter is set. Expected uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL This parameter specifies the hysteresis of an inter-layer or inter-priority handover. This parameter is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers. According to the P/N criterion. The greater the value of this parameter is set. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. This parameter is used with the can be triggered. the more The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered. the more When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH. According to the P/N criterion. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the priority of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered. an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH The lower the value of this parameter is set. a layered hierarchical The greater the value of this parameter is set. The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes. The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. This leads 1. some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of uplink receive level of the adjacent cell. When this parameter is set to Yes. The greater the value of this parameter is set. a layered hierarchical The greater the value of this parameter is set. the cell is listed in the candidate cells based This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent None 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover. . the more consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the configured F2H HO Threshold for a predefined period. According to the P/N criterion. The greater the value of this parameter is set. This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover. This parameter is used with the can be triggered. If this parameter is set to a too great value. some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. difficult the AMR handover can be triggered. if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. If this parameter is set to a too small value. a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. 1. That is. The triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO This parameter determines the period during which the triggering conditions of the intracell full-rate to half-rate handover are met. an unwanted cell may become the candidate cell. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes. Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate cells for handovers. Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH. According to the P/N criterion.

if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. Considering the preceding factors.According to the P/N criterion. This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. co-channel interference. and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. Based on the path loss. based on the layers and priorities. The layered hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell has the highest priority in the queue or if the level of the target cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. The lower the layer is. This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled. cross coverage. you can enable the . If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set. If the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value. If the PBGT handover is enabled. an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. a BQ emergency handover is performed. In dual-band networking mode for densely populated urban areas. the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered. the higher the priority is. If the PBGT handover is enabled. if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. the edge handover algorithm is enabled. cross coverage. the call may drop if the receive level is too low. The greater the value of this parameter is set. the higher the priority is. Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. call drop may easily occur. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. If the PBGT handover is enabled. The Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled. The longer the distance is. The greater the value of this parameter is set. the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered. the MS is This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. If the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value. calls are handed over to the cells with high priority (priority is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority). an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS. In other words. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. The lower the hierarchy is. This parameter should be adjusted as required. an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. None None None None Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. The concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. According to the P/N criterion. The Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold If the UL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for a period. The propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater than the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. Then. Cells are set to different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical handover. the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. The greater the value of this parameter is set. If the DL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a period. In other words. the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. an The greater the value of this parameter is set. co-channel interference. the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. the interference handover is triggered. When the UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal level or channel interference. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. This parameter should be adjusted as required. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion. The concentric cell handover can be classified into the UL subcell to OL subcell handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set. and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The concentric cell handover can improve system capacity and conversation quality. When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality is lower than the interference handover quality threshold. The TA handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA threshold. a TA handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. To avoid such a call drop. the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered. call drop may easily occur. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold. This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. Whether a BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER). if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. When this function is enabled. the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference. an edge handover is triggered. When an MS makes a call at the edge of a cell. the edge handover is triggered. if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. difficult the edge handover can be triggered. the greater the TA value is. When the UL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. the more edge handover is triggered. To avoid ping-pong handovers. an edge handover can be performed. According to the P/N criterion. This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled.

The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. the CRO should be less than 25 dB because excessively large CRO may bring This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection.08 and 04. This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. such as 16. ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH It is recommended that you select a greater value. TO. After the sequence is adjusted. or 25. 0508 and 0408. No for highcell handover is not subject to this parameter. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion. Actually. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. To properly specify the value of this parameter. this parameter can be set to Yes. This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. For details. The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions: An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. If this parameter is set to 0. When the signaling traffic of the network increases.02 and 05. densely populated urban areas. the usage of radio resources drops. see GSM Rec. and the average This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel. When PT is set to 31.In addition.08. For details. This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to YES. This parameter can prevent frequent location update. see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis. The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel.This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. For details. 20.In addition. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). see GSM Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short). this parameter determines the priority of cells. It is invalid for cell reselection. thus reducing the number of handovers. the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. improve success rate of channel assignment. This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. see GSM Rec. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the . the service performance is improved. In the VLR. the number of paging sub-channels in a cell None None None The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should guarantee that cells with same priority have the same cell reselect offset. in the area with heavy traffic. in the area with light traffic. This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled. suburbs. see GSM Rec. the target cell to which the MS is handed over may not be the cell with the best signal quality. when the location update period decreases. When necessary. such as 2 or 3. 05. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs. see GSM Rec. If this parameter is set to 1. the number of handovers can be reduced and a better cell can be assigned to the MS. In actual situation. thus improving the network performance. For details. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. 05. and balance the traffic load among cells. but a smaller value. If this parameter is properly configured. and rural areas. sent on the broadcast channel. the MS power consumption increases. If this parameter is set to Yes.08. 0408 and 0508. 1: barred 0: allowed Together with CBA. that is. it becomes more difficult for an MS to access the cell when CRO increases. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. When the location update period decreases. speed circumstances When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network. a regular location update timer is defined. the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4 message. Generally. the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority. Thus. If this parameter is set to Yes. the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. and PT are used. This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS where cell reselection parameters can be obtained. thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. Note: A forced intracommon urban areas. For details. it is The larger this parameter is set. the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed. the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 This parameter specifies the manual correction of C2. For details. extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used. Yes for hot-spot areas. The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system. This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. If the value of this parameter increases. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. indicates whether CRO.

this needs to keep the test duration for continuously transmitting the uplink data of the old channel. To reduce the collisions on the RACH and to improve the efficiency of the RACH. If the timer expires. For different cells in the same LAC. the BSC deactivates the channel. if the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires. the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. The BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires. Upon receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC. and S This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. 04. If the TC resources are changed before and after the handover. and the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the call is. thus saving the network processing time and network resources. see GSM Rec. this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected. an access algorithm is defined in GSM Rec. the outgoing BSC handover fails. 04. the timer is initiated when the ERROR INDICATION. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. In an intra-cell handover. CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION. the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS.08. the timer T3109 (AMRFR) stops.08. this seizes the radio resources too much. This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. this parameter is set to 20 ms. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1. only handovers are allowed in a cell. This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. If this timer is set to a lower value. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a higher value. The increase in T and S prolongs the access time of an MS. . This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. If bit N is This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). None None If this timer is set to a higher value. Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. The timer stops after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMPLETE message. If this timer is set to a higher value. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires. If TDM transmission is used on the Abis interface. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). the timer T3109 (AMRHR) stops. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. this parameter is set to 10 ms. After the CCCH is configured. None The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. If this timer is set to a higher value. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires. This parameter specifies the number of timeslots between the consecutive transmissions of channel request messages by an MS. If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is large. if the timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires. If this timer is set to a higher value. For a common cell. this may influence the handover success rate. When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR encoding mode. For details. Therefore. their ATTs must be the same. the BSC sends a handover failure message. Together with CBQ. If this parameter is set to Yes. For the call on the TCH in stable state. Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed. the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message. If this timer is set to a lower value. if IP transmission is used on the Abis interface. After the timer expires. T should be set to a small value. and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. this parameter should be If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is small.This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. the BSC deactivates the channel. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0. The algorithm specifies three parameters: Tx-integer (T for short). The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. if the timer T3109 expires. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. If this timer is set to a higher value. the timer stops. the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. thus affecting the access performance of the whole network. the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires. If this timer is set to a lower value. When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR encoding mode. this may influence the handover success rate. This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops. this may influence the call reestablishment success rate. and influences the channel resource utilization. This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance. If this timer is set to a lower value. The CBA function applies to special conditions. maximum number of retransmissions (RET). network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off. the BSC deactivates the channel. T should be set to a great value. this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. and direct access of an MS is not allowed. If this timer is set to a higher value. and RELEASE INDICATION messages are received. Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

T3101 is stopped. this may influence the handover success rate. In an outgoing BSC handover. the BSS releases channel resources and cause the congestion. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot -the lowest uplink signal None None This parameter specifies the maximum number of paging messages that a cell is allowed None to send within a statistical period. The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message. this may influence the handover success rate. Before the timer channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a higher value. In an intra-BSC handover. After the timer expires.5 second. the seized SDCCH channel. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value. None This parameter specifies whether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping supports the intelligent power consumption decrease. The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0. the timer T3107 is initiated. after the BSC sends a handover request message. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets. If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a lower value. the timer stops. this may influence the After the timer T3107 expires. the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. Before the timer T3103 expires. This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. . this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. After the timer T7 expires. T3107 expires. if the BSC receives the CC If this timer is set to a higher value. Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable. the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message. Qtru Signal Merge Switch The QTRU signal merge algorithm is to prevent the calls with great difference between uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot. None Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable. If this timer is set to a lower value. this may influence the handover success rate. if the timer expires. None This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell None paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on. this may waste the message before the timer expires. This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed to send within a statistical period. the BSC sends a handover failure message. the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover command. If this timer is set to a higher value. If this timer is set to a lower value. assignment success rate. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. the BSC sends a handover failure message. the timer stops if the BSC receives a Handover Complete message. If this timer is set to a higher value. Before the timer T7 expires. this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value. if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message.This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. which is an None integral multiple of 50 ms. this may influence the immediate assignment success rate. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires. this may waste the After the BSC sends a handover command. If the timer expires. the BSS releases the seized SDCCH. The MS reports a Clear REQ message. If this timer is set to a higher value. the timer T7 is initiated.

None This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intrathrough assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. None None This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services. 1 specifies no optimization. When this parameter is set to No. When the call drop counters are optimized. If this parameter is set to Yes. When the call drop counters are optimized. maximum. When the call drop counters are optimized.The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. 1 specifies no optimization. Main/Diversity: current. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the cell handover. When the call drop counters are not optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by intra-cell handover timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the call drops caused by resource check are not contained in the statistics of call drops. that is. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by no MRs for a long time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops. and mean values of the main and 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by incoming-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized. None This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use. the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the paging messages are packaged according to cells. When the call drop counters are not optimized. otherwise. 1 specifies no optimization. When this parameter is set to Yes. 1 specifies no optimization. assignment procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers. This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result. whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics None algorithm II. when the frequency scanning function is enabled. 1 specifies no optimization. If the paging message packaging timer is enabled. The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell. minimum. None This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message. When the call drop counters are optimized. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies. the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by this reason are None None None None None None None . the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell is out of service. the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be preempted. This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the cell is out of service.

1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are This parameter specifies whether the repeater is configured in a cell. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. When the call drop counters are optimized. Not only the repeater can improve the base station coverage. the call drops caused by radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization.the call drops caused by the reasons except for the radio link failure. therefore. When the call drop counters are not optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. if the TRX aiding detection starts immediately after cell initialization.0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by OM intervention are not contained in the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by unsolicited DM response are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. None None None None None None None None None None None None If this parameter is set to Yes. the synchronous handover is performed. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the connection failure message is sent by the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call reestablishment times out. . When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. but also increase the total traffic volume of network. In optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are optimized. OM intervention. the call drops caused by equipment fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the asynchronous handover is performed in intra-BSC handover. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. a wrong decision might be made. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by sequence error are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. a faulty main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering of TRX aiding function after cell initialization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. The cell is unstable after initialization. If the parameter is set too small. the call drops caused by radio link failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. a wrong decision might be made in TRX aiding detection. When the call drop counters are optimized. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. 0 specifies optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized. 1 specifies no optimization. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. otherwise. if the parameter is set too large. handover access failure. When the call drop counters are not optimized. When the call drop counters are optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized. the call drops caused by Abis territorial link fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. this parameter is used to specify a delay. In such a case. the call drops caused by T200 timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. the call drops caused by forced handover failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifies optimization. and the repeater is an extended equipment that is used for the wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. This parameter specifies the delay of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is initialized. The function of repeater is simpler than that of BTS. and radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized. When the call drop counters are not optimized.

the signaling that is. None If the value of this parameter is too small. the BTS periodically time.This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface. see GSM Rec.58. This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request is sent. Thus. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. The higher the value of this parameter is. the BTS sends This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna Azimuth Angle. see GSM Rec. the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages traffic on the Abis interface increases and thus the load of (such as paging messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH. message to the BSC. the BTS frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. . It is one of None the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message. It is recommended that the default value be used. This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. If this parameter is set to Yes. This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service. If the value of this parameter is too great. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell. the BSC cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter. The flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by Abis flow. For details. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19. the system resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot access the network.58. None This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service. It is recommended that the default value be used. It is recommended that the default value be used. Thus. The higher the value of this parameter is. 08. For details. 08. 08. see GSM Rec. For the BSC increases. Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle . The higher the value of this parameter is. This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. see GSM Rec. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. 05. When the resources are allocated in practice. It is recommended that the default value be used. The flow control function applies to the call management. the BSC frequently reports overload indication The overload causes include TRX processor overload. the BSC initiates cell flow control when receiving the RACH overload message from the BTS. Thus. If the value of this parameter is too great. the BTS sends an If the value of this parameter is too small. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. control. This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service.Included Angle/2 This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load measurement. In a GSM900 cell. the BTS This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot. As a result. If the value of this parameter is too small. some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines whether an RACH timeslot is busy.58. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the north to the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction. Thus. If the value of this parameter is too details. The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact. Thus. If this parameter is set to a too great value. a wider bandwidth is occupied by services. the BTS This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication frequently reports overload indication messages to the BSC. For details. and messages to the MSC and thus the MSC may initiate flow AGCH overload. the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times. None None If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the antennas in two cells under one BTS. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. great. This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type 3 and 6 messages. The higher the value of this parameter is. This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service. the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. downlink CCCH overload.05. the receive level of the MS equals the measured receive level in FH minus the receive level obtained from the timeslots on the BCCH TRX. When the BSS is congested. It is one of the cell re-selection parameters in the system information type 3 message. That is. the minimum receive level of MSs is increased to reduce RACH access requests. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the requested bandwidth by the ActGene. the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service.

The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3 greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed. The CCCH overload messages include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink PCH This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication messages. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. RF resource status is not updated in time. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power control and static power control. This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. the interference levels on the idle channels in the period specified by this parameter are averaged. 08. the TRX reports the interference level of each idle channel in the measurement period. the BTS power reduces less and the power reduction effect is not good. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. BTS3001C.If the value of this parameter is greater.58 and 08. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. this parameter is invalid. informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. the BSC cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time. the interference signals are classified None If this parameter is set to a small value. If the value of this parameter is too great. This parameter specifies the period during which interference levels are averaged. the averaging is performed too frequently and resources are wasted. the average result cannot reflect the change correctly. radio resource indication messages are reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased. If the value of this parameter is too small. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. If the value of this parameter is too small. the FCH and SCH signals of adjacent cells do not appear in the same frame to facilitate the MS decoding. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. an error is generated. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER threshold. this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not installed. The value of this parameter has 16 bits. If this parameter is set to Yes. In the radio resource indication message. According to the strength of interference signals. this parameter is shielded.08. If the value of this parameter is too great. an error is generated. The most significant bit indicates whether the parameter is valid. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error. BTS3001C+. the error is small. Therefore. This helps the BSC to assign channels.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load Threshold. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. this parameter is valid. the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. If this parameter is set to a too small value. this parameter is invalid. None If this parameter is set to a great value. This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS.58.This parameter specifies the interval for sending the overload messages. This helps the BSC to assign channels. see GSM Rec. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. For the BTS2X. For other BTSs. RF resource status is reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased.For details. If this parameter is set to a small value. This parameter specifies the maximum number of levels by which the BTS RF power decreases. None None . The result is used to classify the interference levels on the idle channels into five interference bands. Before the BTS sends the radio resource indication message to the BSC. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. If this parameter is set to a too small value. radio resource status is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot None This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. the error is small. the error is small. None For the BTS2X. The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter. the error is smaller. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. and BTS3002C. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. For details. It is used to synchronize the MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized. 08. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS. According to the strength of interference signals. see GSM Rec. For the BTS2X. Thus. None and reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR. the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the BTS. the BTS power reduces too much.

Before performing power control. There are 11 levels of speech quality. The RF connection supports the configuration of the main and diversity antennas. If the level is low. the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control. In addition. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 5. According to the strength of interference signals. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. the receive quality gain will be obtained. the BSC needs to consider this gain. the BSC needs to consider this gain. According to the strength of interference signals. For V9R3 and later. If this parameter is set to StartUp. Before performing power control. According to the strength of interference signals. None This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 8. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 7. is increased to some extent. For the BTS3002C. the BTS reports the VQI. the BTS transmit power is not adjusted during the handover to ensure the success of the handover. This prolongs the service time of the MS battery. This helps the BSC to assign channels. The interference increases. The BSC measures the traffic on a per VQI basis. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. a handover occurs.This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. the directed try procedure is started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports the directed try procedure.5K data service is supported. 0000000001: indicates that only the NT14. This parameter specifies whether to support DRX. the VQI can be measured and reported. the speech quality is good. however. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. According to the strength of interference signals. Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes. When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly. the receive quality gain will be obtained. the BSC needs to consider this gain. The BSC that supports the DRX should send the dispatching message to MSs so that the This parameter specifies the data service supported. the receive quality gain will be obtained. This helps the BSC to assign channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The MS may fail to receive This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). In this case. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. To reduce the power consumption. If this parameter is set to Report. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. the BSC needs to consider this gain. The None load of the cell is greater than or equal to the Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. None None If this parameter is set to StartUp. and thus the speech quality is monitored. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately. The MS that supports the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are interested in. This helps the BSC to assign channels. This parameter is configured for only the BTS3002C. This value of the parameter can be set as required. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs. the interference signals are classified This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. the interference signals are classified None None None None If Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable is set to Yes. This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. the BTS transmit power is adjusted to the maximum before the BSC sends a handover command to the MS. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. 0000000010: indicates that only the NT12K data service is supported. 0000000100: indicates that only the NT6K data service is supported. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 6. the probability that the BTS transmits at full power increases. if each cell is configured with two TRXs (O2 or S2). the BSC cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. None None None . When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. Before performing power control. The handover success rate.

Huawei III power control is performed. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. the BSC needs to consider this gain. Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call. and when the uplink receive None quality is lower than the threshold.This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 4. the BSC needs to consider this gain. Huawei III power control is performed. and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold. the receive quality gain will be obtained. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 2. Before performing power control. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold. Huawei III power control is performed. and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold. Huawei III power control is performed. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 3. Before performing power control. This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell. None None None None None This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC decreases the uplink transmit power. Huawei III power control is performed. This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC increases the uplink transmit power. and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold. Before performing power control. None This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. the receive quality gain will be obtained. Huawei III power control is performed. None . None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold. the BSC needs to consider this gain. the receive quality gain will be obtained. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 1. Before performing power control. the receive quality gain will be obtained. Huawei III power control is performed. the BSC needs to consider this gain. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call.

When the receive level is lower than the threshold. This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC increases the downlink power. None .The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm). This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink power control. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential filtering formula. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. When the receive level is higher than the threshold. Huawei III power control is performed. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm). None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink None receive level. Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality. Huawei III power control is performed. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink power control. Huawei III power control is performed. Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call. None This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC decreases the downlink transmit power. None This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering None formula. Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call. None This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. None This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in None a power control period. This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink power control. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive level. None This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential filtering formula. the downlink power control is performed. This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH None in a power control period. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. None When the receive level is higher than the threshold. . None This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential filtering formula. and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm). None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality. Huawei III power control is performed. Huawei III power control is performed. the downlink power control is performed. When the receive level is higher than the threshold.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm None to -47 dBm). Huawei III power control is performed. None This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call. This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink None power control.

None Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. 1-2.2% to 0. In downlink power control. If this parameter is set to a lower value.This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. Bad UpLEVDiff. Bad Trig Threshold. Level 0: BER smaller than 0. Bad UpLEVDiff. In downlink power control. In the Huawei II power control algorithm. Bad Trig Threshold.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.4% None This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the None receive quality. if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL Qual. None This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the receive level. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal level in power control when the RQ is 0. if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to this threshold. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to a lower value. the power control stops. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a higher value. In the Huawei II power control algorithm. If this parameter is set to a lower value. None This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value of None DL Qual. Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. In the Huawei II power control algorithm. then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. If this parameter is set to a higher value. Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. . This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power None control. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality zone 1 (the RQ value is greater than 0 and less than 3) based on the signal level. None This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the None receive quality. None When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this parameter. Level 0: BER smaller than 0. the dynamic power 0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB) adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Bad UpLEVDiff. if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual. In the uplink power control. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). 1-2. 1-2.2% In uplink power control. If this parameter is set to a lower value. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to this threshold. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level.

This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. the quality is poor without power control. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the downlink level becomes low. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level.When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. the quality is good without power control. power control is performed. . If this parameter is set to a too small value. the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. the quality is poor without power control. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. None None If this parameter is set to Yes. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. the battery life is reduced. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Thus. This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment. When this parameter is set to Yes. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. If this parameter is set to a too great value. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. the downlink level becomes low. the uplink level becomes low. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. the battery life is reduced. the conversation quality is degraded. Thus. the uplink level becomes high without power control. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the Huawei II power control algorithm puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment. This parameter determines the uplink quality upper threshold of the quality zone. thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. Instead. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. If this parameter is set to a too small value. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. Thus. When you configure this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too small value. and call drop may easily occur. When you configure this parameter. Instead. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. When you configure this parameter. the quality is good without power control. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. This parameter specifies whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm. Thus. the uplink level becomes high without power control. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. the quality is poor without power control. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. power control is performed. Thus. conversely. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the stable state quality zone are set. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. the conversation quality is degraded. This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control. Thus. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. If this parameter is set to a too small value. In Huawei II power control algorithm. Thus. power control is performed. the quality is good without power control. If this parameter is set to a too small value. Thus. Thus. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. and call drop may easily occur. Thus. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. power control is performed. the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. the uplink level becomes low. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the quality is poor without power control. In Huawei II power control algorithm. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. the quality is good without power control. and call drop may easily occur. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value.

≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Bad UpLEVDiff. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment. the algorithm This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the cannot realize fast power control. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the BTS.Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. Bad Trig Threshold. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. If this parameter is set to a too small value. then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL None Qual. In Huawei II power control algorithm. the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. with a step of 2 dB.This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment. the power control may be delayed. the algorithm This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the cannot realize fast power control.2% In uplink power control. This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the receive quality. the power adjustment is delayed. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. Bad Trig Threshold. a too great value. After the BSC delivers the power control command. A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. Bad UpLEVDiff. None . Thus. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered. When you configure this parameter. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. 12. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too great value. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. 12. then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff. Therefore. the power control may be performed frequently. it should wait for a certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message. the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value None of the DL Qual. In the uplink power control. If this parameter is set to a too small value. if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the DL Qual. the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to receive level. 12. In downlink power control. if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value If this parameter is set to a too great value. ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL None Qual. If this parameter is set to a too great value. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set 5. If this parameter is set to a too small value. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level. thus wasting the resources. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power control. a too great value.2% None If this parameter is set to a too small value. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level. In Huawei II power control algorithm. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the power ranges from class 0 to class 4. Bad UpLEVDiff. If this parameter is set to a too great value. In downlink power control. In Huawei II power control algorithm. the quality zone is divided into three grades (0. If this parameter is set to signal quality. the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0. if the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL Qual. the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR power control commands.

the uplink level becomes high without power control. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. None If this parameter is set to Yes. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. the conversation quality is degraded. When you configure this parameter. the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When you configure this parameter. If this parameter is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. the quality is good without power control. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. power control is performed. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. If this parameter is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies whether enable Huawei II power control algorithm or Huawei III power control algorithm. the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. Thus. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value None If this parameter is set to a too great value. and call drop may easily occur. the BSC performs weighted filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history measurement reports. and call drop may easily occur. and call drop may easily occur. Therefore. If this parameter is set to a too small value. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. When you configure this parameter. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the battery life is reduced. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. The measurement reports may be obtained by the BTS/MS at This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the MS. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control. the downlink level becomes low. Thus. the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. Thus. it should wait for a certain period before receiving an acknowledgement message.After the BSC delivers the power control command. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the signal quality is good without power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value. Thus. the conversation quality is degraded. the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Thus. Thus. the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. the quality is poor without power control. Thus. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. If this parameter is set to a too small value. Thus. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. the battery life is reduced. When you configure this parameter. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. If this parameter is set to a too small value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. the uplink level becomes low. Thus. . the quality is good without power control. This parameter specifies whether the compensation of measurement reports is allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm. the power adjustment is delayed. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment. power control is performed. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. power control is performed. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality. If this parameter is set to a too great value. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment. power control is performed. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment. the conversation quality is degraded. you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value On receiving some consecutive measurement reports. the downlink level becomes low. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. the quality is poor without power control. Thus. If this parameter is set to a too great value. When determining whether to perform power control. Thus. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. thus the conversation quality is If this parameter is set to a too great value. the battery life is reduced. the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power adjustment. the quality is good without power control. the quality is poor without power control.

If this parameter is set to a higher value. To transmit the uplink RLC data blocks during inactive period. and call drop may easily occur. the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. After sending the last downlink RLC data block and confirming that all downlink data blocks are received. if this parameter is set to a lower value. This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to a lower value. the influence of Cn1 on Cn increases. the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Therefore. the N3101 is initiated. this parameter determines the reduced level of the MS transmit power mapping to the path loss. Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data blocks (CountValue=0) from the MS that supports the extended uplink TBF function. the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results decreases. If this parameter is set to a higher value. When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output This parameter specifies the initial power level. If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3101. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. the output power of the MS increases. This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3105. The network reserves the RLC uplink blocks mapping This parameter specifies the release delay of the downlink TBF. thus wasting the uplink resources. the network does not immediately notify the MS of releasing this TBF but forcedly set the last data block not received. keep this TBF unreleased by continuously resending the last downlink data block with the Relative This parameter specifies the inactive period of the extended uplink TBF. the uplink level becomes high without power control. the power control may be performed frequently. the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the N3103. this wastes the wireless resources and influences the the access performance of other MSs in the network. If this parameter is set to a higher value. Upon receiving the last RLC data block when the uplink transmission is complete. the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS has not received the message of If this parameter is set to a higher value.The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. the tolerance of the network to uplink errors decreases and the probability of the frequent TBF release increases. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the uplink TBF frequently releases and establishes. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. If this parameter is set to a too great value. the release time of the uplink TBF delays due to no response of the MS caused If this parameter is set to a lower value. the power control may be delayed. the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases. the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results increases. thus increasing the . If this parameter is set to a too small value. This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power control. the release delay of the uplink TBF increases. the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of If this parameter is set to a lower value. This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the packet idle mode. thus causing the useless signaling seizing the channel bandwidth and wasting the downlink resources. None This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is measured for the uplink power control. the network initiates the N3105. In uplink dynamic assignment mode. PCH. the network increases N3105 This parameter specifies the maximum value of the N3103. If this parameter is set to a too small value. the abnormal uplink TBF release increases caused by the overflow of the N3103. otherwise. This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode. which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode. None If this parameter is set to a lower value. the MS can use this TBF that automatically becomes active None If this parameter is set to a higher value. the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if the downlink data blocks carry the USF value. If this parameter is set to a too great value. After a downlink TBF is established. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times. This parameter is used for the open-loop power control. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the packet transfer mode. the network does not release this uplink TBF immediately but set it to the inactive mode. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control. thus wasting the resources. If this parameter is set to a lower value. the output power of the MS decreases. Thus. After the network starts to assign a USF value to the uplink TBF (uplink TBF is established). if this parameter is set to a lower value. the network resets the N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field. Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the uplink level becomes low. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the idle mode. if this parameter is set to a lower value. which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode. namely. the influence of Cn1 on Cn increases. The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH. the tolerance of the network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of the frequent TBF release increases. if this parameter is set to a lower value.

parameter is set to a lower value. the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases. This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined. and the This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell. because the BSC6000 does not support the If this parameter is set to a higher value. the number of This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to a lower value. None . the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases. and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. the weight of current signal level increases. the weight of the previous signal level increases. if this parameter is set to a lower value. and the If this parameter is set to a higher value. If this parameter is set to a higher value. After This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be controlled. if this quality is worsened. None This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells. To establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF. parameter is set to a lower value. the load-based reselection is triggered easily. you can infer that the transmission and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. If the number of times is lower than this parameter. If this parameter is set to a higher value. None This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is allowed. if this parameter is set to a higher value. the network will notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF for a period of delay after this parameter is set. the cell reselection is allowed. if this parameter is set to a lower value. the load-based reselection is triggered difficultly. If the times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases. if this parameter is set to a lower value. thus greatly reducing the downlink TBF establishment time. This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is allowed. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level is lower than this threshold. None This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is allowed. If this parameter is set to a higher value. This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases. if the MS needs to send new uplink data. This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period. the number of cell reselections decreases. and the If this parameter is set to a higher value. the decision may not be performed immediately. this can increase the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the PACCH. the number of cell reselections increases. If this parameter is set to a higher value. the probability of the cell reselection decreases. if this parameter is set to a lower value. the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases. if this parameter is set to a lower value. you can infer that the transmission and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. the number of This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter. This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF. the precision of decision may be reduced. the probability of the cell reselection increases. if this quality is worsened. None This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell reselection procedure.This parameter specifies the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF. the previous MR is thought to be invalid. MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold. If the times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases. you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened. Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data block (CountValue=0). MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold. however. If the receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold.

the BSC reserves uplink resources for the BTS. The BTS obtains the channel request information of the MS None This parameter is configured according to the congestion of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. . calculated number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission quality measurement report reaches this threshold. the critical reselection is triggered easily. The cell penalty can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only. This higher level. if this parameter is set to a lower value. If this parameter is set to a higher value. If the service type carried in the received message is POC. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. it is difficult for the MS to reselect this cell. the underlaid-to-overlaid None None None When this parameter is set to Yes. and supports the handover between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell. if this parameter is set to a lower value. if this parameter is set to a lower value. and throughput class. the time greatly reduces. when this parameter specifies the cell reselection. the uplink/downlink This parameter specifies whether to support the packet assignment. the BSC supports the PDCH configured in the overlaid subcell or in the underlaid subcell. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The QoS control parameters include the service priority class. This parameter specifies whether to support the QoS optimization. target cell only if the target cell has a lower level. it is difficult to trigger the load-based reselection. reliability class. that is. the cell can receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. If the service type carried in the received message is POC. This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined when the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality measurement report is lower than this threshold. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network. In version V9R8. the assignment of the packet channel to the MS through the PACCH. if the overlaid voice services are congested. If the underlaid voice services are congested. the critical reselection is triggered difficultly. the level of the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. conversely. The QoS level is determined in the subscription. the MS can be This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives the handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection. the critical reselection is triggered easily. This parameter specifies the policy of the handover between the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell in a PS domain. The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong reselection between cells. If this parameter is set to a higher value. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as None a candidate cell for handover. the MS can be handed over to the parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time. This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. if this parameter is set to a lower value. The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold. the critical MS.This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold. the uplink/downlink This parameter specifies the lower limit of the bandwidth for the POC services. after the packet assignment is taken over to the BTS. If the value of this parameter increases. delay class. To avoid ping-pong handovers. The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively reselection is triggered difficultly. If this parameter is set to a higher value. this only involves the takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. the Transfer Delay in the This parameter specifies the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services. The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. the cell will receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding percentage. If the service type carried in the received message is POC. That is. The network should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. This parameter specifies the maximum transmission delay of the POC services. conversely. This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of If this parameter is set to a higher value. it is easier for the MS to reselect this cell. it is easier to trigger the load-based reselection. the access delay of the MS reduces. the MS cannot be handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection fails or the load-based reselection occurs within the time longer than this value. the overlaid-tounderlaid subcell handover is only allowed. If this parameter is set to a higher value.

None None None The higher the value of this parameter is. the smaller the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is. the access delay of the MS reduces. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. set this parameter to UNFIXED. which is used for the MS to calculate the measurement results. This parameter can be used to obtain the forgetting factor. you dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. Gbr:guaranteed bit rate. This parameter specifies the average period of bit error detected. the larger the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is. it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4. the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment When both the MS and the network support PFC. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. increase the CS type. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1. If this parameter is set to a modest value. increase the CS type. During the data transmission process. This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. When this parameter is set to Yes. Then. of this parameter. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2. set the parameter to MCS6. you should dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the QoS parameters are obtained from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS. it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value. When the MS or the network does not support PFC. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. for the cell with the poor Um interface quality. it is hard to decrease the CS type. of this parameter. it is hard to increase the CS type. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink. you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. it is easy to decrease the CS type. set the parameter to MCS4. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value. otherwise. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. it is hard to decrease the CS type. increase the CS type. It is relative to the uplink immediate assignment. you should fixedly use an MCS type for all This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. it is hard to decrease the CS type. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink. of this parameter.Setting and effect This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.This parameter specifies whether to support the takeover of the packet immediate assignment by the BTS. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink. thus improving the quality of links. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3. This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. When the MS initiates the channel request. you should fixedly use an MCS type for all This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. it is easy to decrease the CS type. Then. . To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink. the BSS pre-allocates the uplink TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. you should set this parameter to UNFIXED. the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to dynamically adapt to the radio transmission environment. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. it is hard to increase the CS type. it is easy to downlink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value value. This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. it is hard to increase the CS type. it is easy to decrease the CS type. you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the If this parameter is set to an excessive value. None For the cell with the good Um interface quality. . the QoS parameters are obtained from the ABQP in the PFC. you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9.

If this parameter is set to a modest value. or CS4. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1. this parameter. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2. this parameter is set to UNFIXED. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Then. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Then. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. CS2. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3. If this parameter is set to a modest value. it is easy to decrease the CS type. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink. set the CS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter.This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink. it is hard to decrease the CS type. CS2. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink. If this parameter is set to a modest value. this parameter can be set to None CS1. it is easy to decrease the CS type. this parameter is set to UNFIXED. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. it is hard to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of value. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. increase the CS type. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. it is hard to decrease the CS type. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. The background class service is a kind of traffic class services. This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. all TBFs use the default CS types. it is hard to increase the CS type. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink. set the CS type for transmitting the None first TBF through this parameter. . increase the CS type. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink If this parameter is set to an excessive value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. None None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP2. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is hard to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink. the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. it is hard to increase the CS type. it is easy to decrease the CS type. This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. this parameter. this parameter can be set to CS1. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If this parameter is set to a modest When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink. the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. CS3. CS3. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1). If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink. it is easy to increase the CS type. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink. it is easy to TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3. or CS4. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. all TBFs use the default CS This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink. it is easy to TBF to change from CS3 to CS4.

it is difficult to seize dynamic When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is easy to seize dynamic channels. If the UL voice service is congested. This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. there are of TCHs + PDCHs. Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all This parameter specifies the timer set to release the idle dynamic channel after all TBFs on the dynamic channel are released. Reporting the frequency of None one strongest cell. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. the dynamic channel continues to be This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted. When a channel is idle. it is difficult to seize dynamic channels. If this parameter is set to a modest value. channels. a timer is started when the channel is idle.This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1 (ARP1). The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs + services. This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more. All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the dynamic channels. If this threshold is high. If this threshold is low. the idle Abis timeslots cannot be fully used. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells. This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP2. This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold. This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services. When the timer expires. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. This affects CS TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. The total number of excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the CS services are affected when there are too many PS services. and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher If this threshold is set to a higher value. Before the timer expires. This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold. If this parameter is set to a lower value. This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total number If this parameter is set to a modest value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. Instead. dynamic channels are used. insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. static PDCHs). dynamic channels are used. and the uplink If this threshold is high. this timer is started. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the dynamic channel is converted at the UL cell. This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and PS services. When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the PS services are affected. and the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher. the Abis timeslots may be applied frequently. If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value. Reporting the frequencies of three strongest cells . and the If this parameter is set to a lower value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more. If this threshold is low. If this threshold is set to a higher value. Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells. the dynamic channel resources may be wasted when there are no services for a long time. If this parameter is set to a modest value. if there are new services. it is easy to seize dynamic channels. The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs. This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots. This affects PS This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value. the dynamic channel is not released immediately. this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer. The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs. the Abis timeslots are released. it is possible that a dynamic channel is requested immediately after being This parameter is configured according to the congestion counter of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. there are This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer.

the period when cell reselection is prohibited decreases. None In different routing areas. The frequent cell This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported. The usage of cell resources decreases. None . If the priority is low. This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell. c31standard: applied c31notuse: not applied This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area. 1 0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority. if the originating cell and the target cell belong to different routing areas. it is easy for the cell to be selected. 1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet control channel.This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength. the period when cell reselection is prohibited increases. This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection. if this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. Value range: 0. it is difficult for the cell to be selected. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the system. if this parameter is set to an excessive value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low. Therefore. and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell. None This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell. the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs. Yes: The MS can access another cell. If this parameter is set to a modest value. Only the MSs customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell. Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited. Yes: supported No: not supported None None None In the same routing area. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the C2 value measured in the overlapped area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio channels. Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted. When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection. the coverage area of the cell is large. it is hard for cell reselection. When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection. The MS on the edge of the cell may not be able to access the system. If the priority is high. which is used for cell reselection. the MS may not be able to access the channel. If this parameter is set to a modest value. it is difficult for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. No: The MS cannot access another cell. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is easy for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. None This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to the network. the power consumption and radiation of the MS are high. if the originating cell and the target cell belong to the same routing area. This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas. The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31. If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high. the coverage area of the cell is small. If this parameter is set to a modest value. it is hard for cell reselection. the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited. This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31 standards. the MS frequently performs cell reselection.

If the priority is higher than the persistence level. However. the MS can access the cell. radio resources may be wasted. Level 1 is the highest priority. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 3. Value 1 indicates one PAGCH.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Value 1 indicates one PRACH. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 4. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request after the channel request fails.. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the MS can access the cell. None None None . it is easy for an MS to access the cell. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. radio resources may be wasted. However. it is easy for an MS to access the cell. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 2. This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 1. radio resources may be wasted. Level 1 is the highest priority. This parameter specifies the persistence level 3 of radio priority access. If this parameter is set to a modest value. the MS sends a new Channel Request within a long interval after the channel request fails. This parameter specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. Therefore. Otherwise. and level 4 is the lowest priority. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If the priority is higher than the persistence level. and level 4 is the lowest priority. Therefore. Otherwise. Otherwise. However. If the priority is higher than the persistence level. and level 4 is the lowest priority. This parameter specifies the persistence level 2 of radio priority access. the MS resends the access request. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Level 1 is the highest priority. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12.This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random access. Otherwise. The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. the MS can access the cell. the MS cannot access the cell. This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. the MS can access the cell. the MS needs to wait for a long time before sending the next request. the MS cannot access the cell. the MS sends a If this parameter is set to an excessive value. and level 4 is the lowest priority. the MS cannot access the cell. This occupies many resources. too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. If this parameter is set to a modest value. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. it is easy for an MS to access the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level. radio resources may be wasted. but the MS has not received it because None None None None This parameter specifies the access control class. Level 1 is the highest priority.. This may affect MS services..The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs. This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive channel requests.. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs. it is easy for an MS to access the cell. too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. . the PSI1 is sent frequently. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. Therefore. If this parameter is set to a modest value.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. the PSI1 cannot be received in real time. thus reducing access collisions but slowing down the MS access speed. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. This parameter specifies the persistence level 1 of radio priority access. it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. too many MSs may access If this parameter is set to an excessive value. it is possible that a response is sent. the MS cannot access the cell. If this parameter is set to a modest value. Therefore.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. . If no response is received after the minimum number of timeslots. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. However.

The value indicates a higher access priority. the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet If this parameter is set to a modest value. If this parameter is set to a modest value. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. coverage area of the micro cell is large. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and BSIC. The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows: 1. No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported. This parameter specifies the interval between two extension measurement reports. This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS. Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. A higher value Huawei recommends that MSs work in the cell. range 0-20 dB is recommended. the extension measurement report is sent frequently. measurement information is not obtained timely. the MS may The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be is sent. measurement report is sent frequently. Yes: supported No: not supported None None None When this parameter is set to Yes. This parameter can be set to em0 or em1. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. the reselection transfer mode. The timer is sent this parameter should be set to a high value when the through the system message broadcast in each cell. the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time. If this parameter is set to an excessive value. The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode after the measurement report is sent. This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs. and type 3. This occupies many bandwidth resources. measurement report is sent frequently. value 0 is recommended. This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. after the NC NC-measurement report is sent. If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell. None Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. the reselection idle mode. Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs. 2 For the cell with medium traffic. None If this parameter is set to an excessive value. Therefore. type 2. it sends the extension measurement reports. some information may be missing. When the MS is in idle mode. some information may be missing. the access delay of the EGPRS MS is shortened. affected. When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS. This parameter specifies the frequency index of the interference measurement in type 3 None of the extension measurement report.This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. This occupies many bandwidth resources. None This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. . The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report that matches the bitmap. This parameter specifies the type of the extension measurement report Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1. This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4. This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet If this parameter is set to a modest value.

the network requests the MS to send measurement reports to control its cell reselection. Yes: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell. value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32. Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts If the timer is set to a smaller value. Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet short. This parameter specifies the maximum countdown value of the MS. the receive state of the data block is radio resources are not used but occupied. If the RLC/MAC control block is used. None Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0. In addition. None SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is used to set the DRX period. increasing use indicates that this parameter is not used. and level 4 is the lowest priority. None This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. T3168 is started to radio environment decreases. This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and PTCCH/U. many resources are not confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received. decreasing This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. PAN_INC = 2 x PAN_DEC. this parameter is optional. value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7. TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. Network Operation Mode II. Network Operation Operation Mode III. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack If this parameter is set to an excessive value. message. This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after If this parameter is set to a higher value. N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX. the timing advance can be obtained without a polling None message. Four access pulses are recommended. the MS sends the Packet used but occupied for a long time. but the power consumption the CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS of the MS increases. value No When the radio operating environment is poor. the This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. the parameter value improves the transmission rate. The BSC requests for This parameter specifies whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell. The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. In the cell reselection required by the network. the GPRS network is not configured with the Gs classified into Network Operation Mode I. sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message. the small timer Based on the paging channel used by the system. However. Mode II is selected by default. set to Pending and the T3198 is started.This parameter specifies the routing area color code of a GPRS cell. the TBF transfer mode to the packet idle mode. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. If When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and no downlink data needs to be sent. the MS can detect the Assignment message. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description. Network Operation Mode I is used. (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment Some MSs do not support the 11-bit access burst. the MS decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC. the TBF resources receiving the last data block. 8bit is recommended. After the TBF is released. If four access pulses are used. Therefore. The MS sends measurement reports to the When the radio operating environment is good. the parameter value reduces the times of abnormally releasing TBFs. value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7. During the period of non-DRX mode. the MS releases the This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink If the timer is set to a lower value. When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured. the timing advance can be obtained only by sending a polling message. The MS may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer. For the BTS and MS supporting the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based paging groups on the CCCH. the network operation modes are Currently. When the GS interface is configured. Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0. the average delay of packet access is Uplink Assignment message. Level 1 is the highest priority. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. and Network interface or the PCCCH. many Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block. Network Operation Mode II is . If the value of this parameter is set to a modest value. the MS monitors all establishment time decreases. value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. the speed of This parameter specifies the acknowledgment message type used by the MS. DRX It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment (discontinuous reception) is a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message. the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel Request message with the parameter setting in the cell. value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC. Usually. PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC. The MS performs automatic cell reselection. Thus. There are three network control None modes. message on all PCHs and AGCHs in non-DRX mode than in The MS stays in the DRX mode for a certain period when changing from the packet DRX mode. If the TBF This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet establishment fails. 8bit: access using the 8-bit burst 11bit: access using the 11-bit burst This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. nc1: MS control with measurement reports. It is also the maximum value of N3102. nc0: Normal MS control. When T3182 expires. When the MS receives a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A). When None an MS accesses the network. Therefore.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->